2006 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
.................................................................1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Your vehicle may have manual seats. To adjust the
seat, lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the
bar. Try to move the seat back and forth with your body
to be sure the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vertical control is used for reclining your seatback.
information.
Power Seats
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may have this
feature. The driver’s and
passenger’s seatback
lumbar support can be
adjusted by moving the
control located on the
outboard side of the seat
cushions.
If your vehicle has power seats, the controls are located
on the outboard side of the front seat cushions.
• Move the front of the horizontal control up or down
to raise or lower the front part of the cushion.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your seating
position changes, as it may during long trips, so should
the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat
as needed.
• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down
to raise or lower the rear part of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the horizontal
control to move the seat cushion up or down.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle is equipped
with heated front seats, the
buttons are located on
the climate control panel.
There is one button for the driver and one for the front
passenger. Each button has three settings, LO, HI
and off. The active setting appears on the climate control
panel display. The LO setting warms the seatback
and cushion until the seat approximates normal body
temperature. The HI setting has a slightly higher
temperature.
Manual Recline Lever
If your front passenger’s seat has a manual reclining
seatback, the lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat.
To turn on the heated seats, press the button once.
The seat will heat to the HI setting. Press the button
again to switch to the LO setting. Pressing the button
a third time turns the system off.
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatback in place.
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is
turned on. When the vehicle is turned off, the heated
seats automatically turn off. If you wish to have the
heated seats on once the vehicle is restarted, press the
button again.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, pull up on
the lever without applying pressure to the seatback.
Power Recliner
If your vehicle has power reclining seatbacks, the
control is located on the outboard side of the front seats.
Press the top of the vertical control forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback angle.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seat head
restraints can be adjusted
up and down. Pull up
on the head restraint to
raise it. Press the
button located at the
bottom of the head
restraint and push the
head restraint down
to lower it.
Both the front and rear head restraints tilt forward and
rearward, also.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
You can remove the rear head restraints. Press the
button located on top of the seatback and pull up on the
head restraint to remove it.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. There is a tab located
on the outboard sides
of the seatback.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
Pull forward on the tab
to unlock the seatback.
Your vehicle may have a split folding rear seat. A split
folding rear seat allows you to carry long cargo by
folding down part or all of the rear seat. Before you can
fold the rear seatback, you need to unlatch the center
seatbelt buckle.
Use the following steps to lower one or both of the rear
seatbacks:
1. Insert a tool with a
small tip into the slot
as shown to unlatch the
seatbelt buckle. Then
move the belt to the
side so it is not in
your way.
3. Fold the seatback down. This will allow you direct
access to the trunk.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to fold down the other
seatback.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.
2. Reconnect the center
safety belt latch plate to
the buckle as shown.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
3. Make sure the seatback is locked into place by
pushing and pulling on it.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in
the upright, locked position.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in
rules for everyone’s protection.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
We will start with the driver position.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Right Front Passenger Position
Rear Seat Passengers
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go
back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across
you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
{CAUTION:
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the buckle end of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be
worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe
or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 1-25. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash
a baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have
a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be
secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of
personal injury. When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in
a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle – even when no child is in it.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be attached using only the top tether and anchor.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
To assist you in locating the
top tether anchors, the top
tether anchor symbol is
located on the trim cover.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
j(Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
The top tether anchors are located under the trim covers
on the rear seatback filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
i(Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Rear Seat
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
5.1. Find the top tether anchor.
5.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover to
open the cover and expose the anchor.
5.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
5.4. Route and tighten the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1. Find the lower anchors, if equipped, for the desired
seating position.
2. If the desired seating position does not have lower
anchors, see Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
installing the child restraint using the safety belts.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the
child restraint to the lower anchors, if equipped,
in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint posts.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint posts.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the child
restraint and to step five under Lower Anchors and
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt
back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
for more information on this including important
safety information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
ON or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the top
tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with
the child restraint say that the top tether must be
anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
top tether.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 1-60. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. You
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
7. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the rearview
mirror will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned
to ON or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has six airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal
airbag for the right front passenger,
• a seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and another for the right front passenger,
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket, or
aftermarket equipment such as seat covers heaters
or massagers, located between the seat cushion and the
child restraint or small occupant, can affect how the
passenger sensing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling/securing the child restraint or small occupant.
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
And, for some unrestrained occupants, frontal
airbags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful airbags have
provided in the past.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
Where Are the Airbags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s side impact airbag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and
the passenger directly behind the driver is in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Never secure anything to the
roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or
tie-down through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating airbag will be
blocked. Do not let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact airbag. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the front
passenger and the passenger directly behind the front
passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and
near-frontal impacts. For side impact airbags, inflation
is determined by the location and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel, instrument panel, the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the door and the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for side impact airbags.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed to
deflate more slowly and may still be partially inflated
minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module — the steering wheel
hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback
closest to the door for the seat-mounted side impact
airbags and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle
near the side windows — may be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls. The
hazard warning flashers will also come on when the
airbags deploy. If you want to turn them off, press the
hazard warning flasher button twice.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible when you turn your ignition
key to ON or START. The words ON and OFF or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible on the rearview
mirror during the system check. When the system check
is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or
the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the passenger’s frontal
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in the
rearview mirror will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-35.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket,
or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat
heaters and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling or securing the child restraint or small
occupant. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle
has the passenger sensing system. See Adding
page 1-64 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are too close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape, yellow coverings or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the center console), or the
inside rearview mirror can affect the operation of
the airbag system. If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, or the side impact airbag covering on the
ceiling near the side windows, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the airbag module
in the steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, the airbag module and seatback for the
driver’s and right front passenger’s seat-mounted
side impact airbags, or side impact airbag module
and ceiling covering for the roof-mounted side
impact airbag. Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in
a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies contain
the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety belt
pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in
a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One key works all of the
lock cylinders on the
vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Your vehicle has an Immobilizer Vehicle Theft-Deterrent
System. The key has a transponder in the key head
that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase it from your dealer. The key will have
PK3+ stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that
came with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer
if you need a new key made.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Service®.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors or
the trunk and turn on your vehicle’s interior lamps from
about 10 feet (3 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Q(Lock): Press this
symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter
to lock the doors. This also
arms the theft-deterrent
system.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior
lamps will flash and/or the horn will sound when you
lock the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
more information on programming this feature.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work. If
a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
The remote keyless entry transmitter can be used to
recall the memory settings for up to two drivers. For
W(Unlock): Press this symbol on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This also
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Press the button
again to unlock the rest of the doors.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
You can program your vehicle so that the exterior lamps
will flash when you unlock the doors with the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle
programming this feature.
If your vehicle is programmed for remote confirmation,
the doors must be closed for this feature to work. If
a door is open, remote confirmation will be canceled.
L(Panic Alarm): The remote keyless entry transmitter
comes equipped with an instant panic alarm. Press
the horn symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
will sound and the exterior lamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. To stop the instant panic alarm, press the
symbol again or turn the ignition to ON.
V (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunk.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
or similar object to remove the old battery.
Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Press any button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to resynchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors from the outside with the key
or remote keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off
the alarm. If the windows are down and the doors
are locked, don’t reach in to manually unlock the vehicle
because you will set off the alarm.
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
From the inside, use the
manual lock levers located
on the door panels near
the windows.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Central Door Unlocking System
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking feature. When
unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the other
doors by holding the key in the turned position for a
few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in the
lock cylinder.
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of
the doors.
When the power door lock switch or the lock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed when
the key is not in the ignition and the driver’s door
is opened, a chime will sound three times indicating that
delayed locking is active.
Power Door Locks
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.
The power door lock
switches are located on
the front doors.
You can press the door lock switch or the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter again to override
this feature and lock the doors immediately.
You can turn this feature off using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). When delayed locking is off, the doors
will lock immediately when you press the power
door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless
page 3-70 for more information.
Press the bottom part of the power door lock switch to
lock or the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
You must use the manual levers to lock and unlock
the rear doors when riding in the rear seat.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on
your vehicle from the inside.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle is programmed so that the doors will lock
automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition
is on, and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
The doors will automatically unlock when you stop the
vehicle and move the shift lever back into PARK (P).
The rear door security locks
are located on the inside
edge of each rear door.
You must open the rear
doors to access them.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the vehicle is
programmed so that the doors will lock automatically
after the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km). The doors
will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned
off and the key is removed from the ignition.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch. When the door is closed again,
it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or
the power door lock switch to lock the door.
To use these locks, do the following:
The power door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
on programming, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-70.
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to engage the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. If you
close the doors, you can lock them using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or
by pressing the power lock switch a second time.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to disengage the lock.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lock Release
Trunk
The remote trunk release
button is located on the
lower portion of the
driver’s door.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
For a vehicle with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For a
vehicle with a manual transmission, the shift lever must
be in NEUTRAL with the parking brake set.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Press the button to open the trunk. You can also press
the button with the trunk symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to open the trunk.
If your vehicle is ever without power, you can still
access the trunk area. Use one of the following
procedures to open the trunk manually.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is equipped with the rear seat
pass-through door, do the following:
Rear-Seat Pass Through
If your vehicle is equipped with the rear seat-pass
through door, you can access the trunk without opening
the trunk lid. This is especially useful when transporting
long items.
1. Fold the rear armrest down and open the
pass-through door. See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”
following for more information.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the
emergency trunk release handle. See “Emergency
Trunk Release Handle” following.
To open the door, pull down the rear seat armrest.
Then pull the lever all the way down to release the door.
To close the panel, push the door up and back into
place. Then try to open the door without pulling up on
the lever to make sure it is locked into place.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open
the trunk lid.
If your vehicle is equipped with the split folding rear
seat, do the following:
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the
trunk release handle.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open
the trunk lid.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the back wall of the trunk. This handle
will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release
handle toward the front of the vehicle to open the trunk
from the inside.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest near each
window.
Press the up or down arrows on the switches to raise or
lower the windows.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the ignition
has been turned off for up to 10 minutes. For more
information, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-24.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program each window, follow these steps:
Express-Down Window
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
press and hold the down arrow on the power
window switch until the window has fully opened.
This feature is on all the power windows. Press the down
arrow on the switch to the second position to activate the
express-down feature. If you want to stop the window as
it is lowering, press the down arrow on the switch again.
2. Press the up arrow on the power window switch
until the window is fully closed.
Express-Up Window
3. Continue holding up arrow on the switch for
approximately two seconds after the window
is completely closed.
This feature is on both front power windows. Press
the up arrow on the switch to the second position
to activate the express-up feature. If you want to stop
the window as it is raising, press the up arrow on
the switch again.
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other front window.
Programming the Power Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will
return to normal operation once the obstruction
or condition is removed.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Window Lockout
This feature allows you to disable the passenger
window switches.
{CAUTION:
The passenger window
lockout button is located
below the power window
switches on the driver’s
door armrest.
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window switch
all the way down in the express position. The window will
rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is re-activated.
Press the button to disable the passenger window
controls. The light on the button will illuminate, indicating
that the feature is in use. The passenger windows still
can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
To restore power to the passenger windows, press the
button again. The light on the button will go out.
You can program this feature to disable all passenger
windows or only the rear passenger windows. See
information.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sun Visors
Theft-Deterrent System
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can
also be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side to block glare from that direction.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
The driver’s sunshade may also have buttons for a
built-in garage door opener. See Universal Home
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. The light will
automatically come on. The light will go out when you
close the cover.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security
light will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
To arm the system, do the following:
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
1. Lock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the power door lock switch.
2. Close all the doors. The security light will illuminate.
It should go off within approximately 30 seconds.
Your security system is now armed.
If a door or a trunk is opened without a key or a remote
keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound and the
lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The theft-deterrent system won’t arm if you lock the
doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It
activates only if you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter or the power lock on the door.
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the remote keyless entry transmitter and close
the door. Wait approximately 30 seconds until
the security light goes off.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the
following:
• The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
the manual door lock after the doors are closed if
you don’t want to arm the theft-deterrent system.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and
the exterior lamps will flash.
• Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Pressing the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
disables the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a
door any other way will activate the alarm when a
door or the trunk is opened.
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with your key, using the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with
a valid key.
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm
by using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, or by starting the vehicle with a valid key.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-103. If the fuse does not need to be replaced,
you may need to have your vehicle serviced.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle is equipped
with a passive
theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
The system works when you turn the key to ON. The
key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in your vehicle. The correct key will start the
vehicle. If the key is ever damaged, you may not be
able to start your vehicle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does
not start and the security light comes on, the key may
have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off
and try again.
To program a new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition and
start the engine. If the engine will not start see
your dealer for service.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer who can service the
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON
within ten seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed. It may not be apparent that the
security light went on due to how quickly the key is
programmed.
theft-deterrent system to have a new key made.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the
vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional
keys only.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine
if you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service the theft-deterrent system
to have new keys made. To program additional keys
you will require two current driver’s keys. You must add
a step to the following procedure. After Step 2, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key.
Then continue with Step 3.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Service®.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key
to four different positions.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines for the first
500 miles (805 km):
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain from
using the full throttle while driving. Avoid
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
If these procedures are not followed, your engine,
axle, or other parts could be damaged.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this break-in guideline every
time you get new linings.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
of your vehicle and more information.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can
insert or remove the key. This position locks the ignition,
steering wheel and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent
feature.
Key Release Button
(Manual Transmission)
The key cannot be
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off
the engine, but still turn the steering wheel.
removed from the ignition
of manual transmission
vehicle unless the key
release button is used.
C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehicle has
an automatic transmission and you turn off the engine,
the transmission will lock. If you need to shift the
transmission out of PARK (P), the ignition key has to
be in ON.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
To remove the key, do the following:
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY.
2. Press and release the button and then turn the
key to OFF.
Do not hold the button in while turning the key
to OFF.
3. Pull the key straight out of the ignition switch.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert a narrow, pointed object into the hole in the
steering column cover and press the spring.
Steering Column Ignition Lock Release
(Automatic Transmission)
4. Then, turn the ignition switch to OFF and remove
the key.
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, you can still release the ignition lock and
remove the key. Use the following procedure to release
the steering column:
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned
from ON to OFF:
• Radio
• Power Windows
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(CTS, if programmed)
• Sunroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or
if a door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, close all the doors and turn the ignition key
to ON and then back to OFF.
1. Locate the plastic screw head on the underside of
the plastic cover for the steering column.
2. Insert a flat, thin object into the slot and turn it
until the plastic piece detaches from the steering
column cover.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If your engine will not start, or starts but then stops,
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you turn the key
to START. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing.
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
Engine Coolant Heater
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety
feature.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. Then, let go of the key; the
engine will start automatically. The idle speed
will go down as your engine gets warm.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have an
internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This will
prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when
the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on
the cord.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
For the 2.8L V6 and the 3.6L V6 engines, the
cord is located in the engine compartment on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle in front of the
fuse block. For the 6.0L V8 engine, the cord is
located in the engine compartment on the driver’s
side of the vehicle near the inner fender and above
the strut.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Automatic Transmission Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
{CAUTION:
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot
shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever
and release the button on the shifter handle. Push
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) while pressing
the button on the shift lever as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift lever into the gear
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission. See If
page 4-31 for additional information.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use
the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The odometer on the instrument panel cluster will
change from the mileage to a number indicating the
requested gear range when moving the shift lever
forward or rearward. See Speedometer and Odometer
on page 3-33 for more information on the odometer.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage your vehicle. Always
upshift when necessary while using DSC.
While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this
for sport driving or when climbing or descending hills,
to stay in gear longer, or to down shift for more power or
engine braking.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control
(DSC) feature that allows you to change gears similar to
a manual transmission. To use the DSC feature:
1. Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) to the right into the DSC area.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the
engine RPM is too high.
The sport mode light in the
instrument panel cluster
will come on.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that
the transmission has not shifted gears.
While in the DSC mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a
stop and while quickly applying the accelerator to
increase speed. This will allow for more power during
take-off.
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. When
you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still
shift automatically. While driving in sport mode, the
transmission may remain in a gear longer than it
would in the normal driving mode based on braking,
throttle input, and vehicle lateral acceleration.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift lever
forward to upshift or rearward to downshift.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to operate your transmission:
Manual Transmission Operation
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the shift lever
is located on the center console between the front
seats. The following explains how to operate the manual
transmission.
For the CTS, you can shift into FIRST (1) when you
are going less than 25 mph (40 km/h). If you come to
a complete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),
put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch.
Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
FIRST (1).
For the CTS-V, you can shift into FIRST (1) when you
are going less than 40 mph (64 km/h).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
CTS
CTS-V
These are the shift patterns for the six-speed manual
transmissions.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and
SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5)
and SIXTH (6) the same way you do for SECOND (2).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
For the CTS, pull the shift lever quickly to the left and
then forward into gear.
For the CTS-V, your six-speed manual transmission has
a safety feature that prevents you from shifting into
REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is driven at speeds
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). You will be locked out if
you try to shift into REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). If you have turned
your ignition off and wish to park your vehicle in
REVERSE (R), you will have to overcome the lockout
mechanism by moving the shift lever quickly to the right,
and immediately forward into gear using more force
than a normal shift.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL when it
is centered in the shift pattern, not in any gear.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal, completely stop the vehicle, and shift into
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
Skip Shift (CTS-V)
1r4: This may appear in the message center in the
speedometer during light throttle, low speed maneuvers
(15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h)). When this message
appears, you can only shift from FIRST (1) to
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
FOURTH (4) instead of FIRST (1) to SECOND (2).
information.
During the shift from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4), pull the
shift lever straight back using light force on the shift
lever. You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to
turn off this feature. This helps you get the best
possible fuel economy. The skip shift feature is turned
backed on when the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the
engine when downshifting.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear except
FOURTH (4), when the One–to–Four Shift message
comes on, may damage the transmission. Shift
only from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the
One–to–Four Shift message comes on.
If the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h),
or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear. You may have
to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good performance.
This light comes on when:
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169°F (76°C) and you are going 15 to 19 mph
(24 to 31 km/h).
• You are 21 percent throttle or less.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal down with your left foot.
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever
located to the left of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
on the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.
information.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the front of the shift lever while pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
{CAUTION:
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake with your left foot.
information.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
4. Turn the key to OFF.
5. Remove the key from the ignition switch and take it
with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the key
in your hand, the vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into PARK (P)” listed previously.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button on the shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in ON. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-26 for more information.
Before you get out of your vehicle, place the shift lever
in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake.
Turn the ignition key to OFF, press the release button
and remove the key. See “Key Release Button”
information.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), release the button
on the shift lever and ease the pressure on the shift
lever. Push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
while pushing the button on the shift lever as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
into the desired gear.
page 4-39.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your
vehicle when the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when it is on fairly level
ground, always set the parking brake and
move the automatic transmission shift lever to
PARK (P), or the manual transmission shift
lever to NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Mirrors
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with OnStar® controls. For more
page 2-43.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
O (On/Off): The on/off button, located on the lower
left side of the mirror, is used for the automatic dimming
functions of the rearview mirror.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass and OnStar® controls.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the
vehicle is started. Automatic dimming reduces the glare
of lights from behind the vehicle.
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the
upper right corner of the mirror. When on, the compass
automatically calibrates, or sets the driving direction,
as the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle has the navigation
option, the direction the vehicle is facing will be
displayed on the navigation screen.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
and release the on/off button. The indicator light will
illuminate when this feature is on.
O (On/Off): The on/off button is located on the lower
left side of the mirror and is used for the automatic
dimming and compass functions of the rearview mirror.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming feature comes on each time the
vehicle is started.
The compass can be calibrated by pressing and holding
the on/off button until a C is shown in the compass
display.
To turn the automatic dimming feature on or off, press
the on/off button. The indicator light will illuminate
when this feature is on.
Compass Variance
Compass Operation
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the current compass direction.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
driven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust the compass variance.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the
letter C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need to be reset or calibrated.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
Passenger Airbag Indicator
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display, press
the on/off button quickly until you reach the correct
zone number. If C appears in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure to
return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
Outside Power Mirrors
The control on the driver’s
If the vehicle has the memory package, the mirrors can
be programmed for personalization and curb view
assist. For more information, see Memory Seat and
on page 3-70.
door armrest operates both
outside rearview mirrors.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
If the vehicle has the memory seat and mirrors, it will be
capable of adjusting the passenger’s mirror to tilt to a
preselected position when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R). Use this outside curb view assist feature
to view the curb when parallel parking.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector
switch to choose the driver’s side or passenger’s side
mirror. The center position turns the control off so
that the mirrors will not move if the control pad is
touched.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
after a five-second delay, the passenger’s mirror
will return to its original position.
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted,
the mirror controls can be used. See Outside Power
Once a mirror is selected, use the arrows on the control
pad to move the mirror to the correct direction. Adjust
each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and
the area behind your vehicle.
The outside curb view assist can be turned or off
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
information.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar® Emergency where we
can request emergency services be sent to your
location. If you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar® button and they will get you the help
you need.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so that more can be seen
from the driver’s seat. The mirror does not have
a dimming feature.
Outside Heated Mirrors
When the rear window defogger is turned on, it also
warms both outside rearview mirrors to help clear them
of fog or ice. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
information.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
OnStar® Services
• Online Concierge
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections®
Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
Universal Home Remote
System
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control buttons
are located on the
driver’s sun visor.
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few
simple voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile
at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide
for more information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal
Home Remote buttons should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons” later in this section or, for assistance,
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Programming Universal Home Remote
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the “stop and
reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have
a newer garage door opener with rolling codes, please
be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your Universal Home Remote
Transmitter.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with
the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train (learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with
Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers.
They are located in the center console.
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
There are two cupholders located in the rear seat center
armrest. Pull the armrest down to access the
cupholders.
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
Center Console Storage Area
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
If equipped, the center console has a storage tray, a
storage compartment, a dual cupholder with a
removable rubber liner and an armrest. To access the
storage area, pull up on the latch located at the
front of the armrest.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
Map Pocket
Storage Areas
The map/storage pockets are located on each door as
well as on the back of the front seatbacks.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your
door key to lock or unlock it.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has mounting locations for the installation
of a roof rack or luggage carrier, which can be
obtained from your Cadillac dealer. The mounting
locations are on the roof rail. Open the doors to access
them. The threaded nuts are covered with a plastic
cap that must be removed before use.
Roof Rack
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
For more information on purchasing the rack/carrier
as well as installation information, contact your
Cadillac dealer.
Convenience Net
The convenience net attaches to the floor and back
wall of the trunk using four anchor points allowing for
two positions. The net can be attached like a hammock
or anchored to lay flat across the floor of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the trunk as far forward as you can. When not using the
net, hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (Comfort Stop): Turn the control clockwise
to this position to open the glass panel about
three quarters of the way open. The sunshade will open
with the glass panel, or it can be opened manually.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may have a power sunroof. It will operate
when the ignition is turned on, or in Accessory, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
This is called the comfort stop position. It provides less
wind noise than the full-open position.
The sunroof controls are
located on the overhead
console.
A (Full Open): Turn the control clockwise to this
position to open the glass panel all the way. The
sunshade will open with the glass panel, or it can be
opened manually.
I (Vent): Turn the control counterclockwise to this
position to use the vent feature. The glass panel will
tilt upward from the vehicle. The sunshade must
be opened manually.
? (Close): Turn the control to this position to close
the sunroof. The sunshade must be closed manually.
@ (Half Open): Turn the control clockwise to this
position to open the glass panel half way. The sunshade
will open with the glass panel, or it can be opened
manually.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of
the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to the
full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once it
has re-opened, turn the control to the closed position.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The buttons for this feature
are located on the driver’s
door armrest.
Anti-Pinch Feature Override
A condition may exist that causes anti-pinch feature of
the sunroof to activate due to weather or an obstruction.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode.
To override the anti-pinch feature rotate the sunroof
control to the closed position, then press the control
upward and continue pressing upward until the sunroof
reaches the desired position.
In this mode, the sunroof can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Use the following steps to program the buttons:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat including the seatback
recliner and both outside mirrors.
Vehicle Personalization
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may
also have features that can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
2. Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the seat and
mirror positions have been saved.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
button 2.
Memory Seat and Mirrors
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the stored driving
positions. If your vehicle has a manual transmission
and the engine is running, the parking brake must be set
to recall the memory seat driving positions. The stored
driving positions can be recalled without setting the
parking brake if the vehicle is off.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the driver’s
seating and outside rearview mirror driving positions for
up to two drivers.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press one of the numbered memory buttons to recall
the stored setting. Each time a memory button is
pressed, a single beep will sound.
3. Press and hold the exit button located above
buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door armrest
for at least three seconds.
Two beeps will sound to confirm that the exit
position has been saved.
Three chimes will sound and the setting will not be
recalled if you press button 1 or 2 when the vehicle is
not in PARK (P) on an automatic transmission or
the parking brake is not set on a manual transmission.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
memory seat button 2 or the remote keyless
entry transmitter with the number 2 on the back.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter or when you place the key
in the ignition, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-70.
To recall the stored exit positions, press and release
the exit button. One beep will sound, and the seat
will move to the previously stored exit position for the
currently identified driver. If an exit position has not been
stored for this driver, the seat will move all the way
back. The position of the outside mirrors is not stored or
recalled for the exit position.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat or mirror controls.
Two personalized exit positions can also be
programmed. Use the following steps to program exit
positions:
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall the exit positions.
For a manual transmission, the parking brake must
be set to recall the stored exit positions.
1. Press memory seat button 1 or the button with the
unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter with the number 1 on the back to recall
the driving position.
Three chimes will sound and the exit setting will not be
recalled if you press the exit button when the vehicle
is not in PARK (P) on an automatic transmission or the
parking brake is not set on a manual transmission.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired exit position.
If you would like your stored exit position to be recalled
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter or when the ignition is turned off and
the driver’s door is opened, see DIC Vehicle
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
H. Voice Recognition Button. See Navigation System
Supplement.
I. Audio Volume Knob and Source Button (CTS Only).
page 3-102.
C. Reconfigurable Steering Wheel Controls (CTS) or
Message Center Controls (CTS-V). See
page 3-47.
page 3-11.
L. Accessory Power Outlet or Cigarette Lighter. See
G. Audio (Base Audio System) or Audio/Navigation
System (If Equipped). See Audio System(s)
page 3-101.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reconfigurable Steering Wheel
Controls (SWC) (CTS)
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
customize the four steering wheel controls to work with
the OnStar®, the climate controls, audio and traction
control systems.
The controls for this
feature are located on
the left spoke of the
steering wheel.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
If your vehicle is equipped with the base audio system,
do the following:
1. Access the main menu of the audio system by
pressing the TUNE/SEL knob located at the
lower right of the audio system.
2. Scroll through the menu by turning the knob.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When SETUP appears on the display, press the
knob once to select it.
3. Press the multi-function button next to Prog SWC
located at the right of the screen.
4. Scroll through the SETUP menu by turning
the knob.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
available functions.
5. When CONFIGURE SWC KEYS appears on the
display, press the knob once to select it.
5. Once the function desired is highlighted, press and
hold the multi-function button next to the control you
wish to program (1, 2, 3 or 4). The buttons are
located at the right of the display.
6. Scroll through the buttons (1, 2, 3 or 4). Press the
knob to select the desired number.
When a control is successfully programmed, the
function you selected will appear next to the number
of the control at the right of the display.
7. Choose a new function for the control by scrolling
through the list of available functions.
8. Once you’ve highlighted your choice, press the
knob once to select it.
6. Press the multi-function button next to the Back
prompt to exit each menu. If you desire to program
another control, repeat the procedure.
The control you selected is now programmed with
the function you selected.
Each function can only be used once. When you
program a control with a function, that function is
removed from the list of functions available. It will
return to the list if you remove it from the SWC it is
programmed to by programming another function to
that control.
9. Press the CLR button to exit each menu. If you
desire to program another control, repeat the
procedure.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Navigation system,
do the following:
1. Press the MAIN button located to the lower left of
the display.
2. Press the multi-function button next to the Setup
prompt at the right of the display.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. The lever returns automatically when the turn
is complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is complete. The lever returns to its original position
when it’s released.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam-Changer. See
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other driver’s won’t see the signal.
page 3-10.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Fuses
information.
page 3-13.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),
a warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal
On message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under
information.
This feature allows you to use the high-beam headlamps
to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When you do, the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long as
you hold the lever there. Release the lever to
turn them off.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever to
change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pull the
lever back and then release it to change from high
to low beam.
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push
the lever away from you.
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on,
the high beams will be on the next time you start
your vehicle.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will be on,
indicating high-beam
usage.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
in delay for this feature to work.
Windshield Wipers
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position for
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
information.
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more
information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-56.
9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
If your vehicle has the high-intensity discharge (HID)
headlamps, your vehicle will also have headlamp
washers. The headlamp washers help clear the
headlamp lenses.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The headlamp washers
are located on the inboard
side of the headlamp
lenses.
The windshield washer button is located at the end of
the windshield wiper lever.
K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with this symbol
located at the end of the windshield washer lever to
wash the windshield. Washer fluid will spray onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, press and
hold the button.
The headlamps must be on in order to be washed. If
the headlamps are off, only the windshield will be
washed when the washer button is pressed.
If your vehicle is low on washer fluid, the Check Washer
Fluid message will appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-61.
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever. Both
the headlamps and the windshield will be washed.
If the headlamps are on when you wash the windshield,
the headlamp washers (if equipped) will turn on. Both
the windshield and the headlamps will be washed.
See “Headlamp Washer” following for more information.
information.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
Cruise Control
These controls are located
on the end of the
multifunction lever.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position turns the system on.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
turn the cruise control back on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to accelerate when cruise is already active.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on
while cruise control is on.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up
to the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at end
of the lever to increase cruise set speed, your new
set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current
speed for this method to work. If it is not 5 mph higher,
switch cruise switch off, then on, and then reset your
speed using the set button.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Applying the brake or
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever. See Turn
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
shifting into a lower gear will take you out of cruise
control. If you need to apply the brake or shift to a lower
gear due to the grade of the downhill slope, you may
not want to attempt to use your cruise control feature.
The exterior lamp control has the following four
positions:
9 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns off
all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Ending Cruise Control
; (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps together with the
following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal. If your vehicle has a manual transmission,
lightly tapping the clutch will end a cruise control
session also.
Stepping on the brake or clutch pedal will end the
current cruise control session only. Move the cruise
control switch to off to turn off the system completely.
Erasing Speed Memory
5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this position
puts the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode
will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending
upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for about
six seconds. For this feature to work, the exterior lamp
control must be in AUTO.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
When the exterior lamp control is off or in the parking
lamp position and the windshield wiper control is in any
position except off, the Headlamps Suggested message
will appear on the DIC display. See “Headlamps
Suggested Message” under DIC Warnings and
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON or START,
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also
turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
• the exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO with
the headlamps off, and
• an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P) or the
parking brake is not set on a manual transmission.
Headlamps on Reminder
When DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the
DRL are being used. Your instrument panel won’t be lit
up either.
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
information.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it’s dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it’s bright enough outside,
the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the DRL will turn
back on. If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system will come on immediately.
Once you leave the garage, it will take about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it
is light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure your
instrument panel brightness lever is in the full bright
AUTO or to the low-beam headlamp position will turn off
the DRL and cancel the Headlamps Suggested
message. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still turn off and the
Headlamps Suggested message will be displayed. You
can turn it off by pressing the OK button if you have
the Navigation audio system or the CLR button if
you have the Base audio system.
To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the
exterior lamp control off. Then turn on the fog lamps
or parking lamps, and the DRL will turn off. The
Headlamps Suggested message will appear on the
DIC display. This will work regardless of gear position
and whether or not the parking brake is set.
If it’s dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a Headlamps Suggested message will appear
on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC) display.
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL
are still illuminated. Turning the exterior lamp control to
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light Sensor
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
- (Fog Lamps): The band with/or next to this symbol
is used to turn the fog lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
To operate the fog lamps:
• To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band on
the lever up to the dot and release it. The band will
return to its original position.
• To turn the fog lamps off, turn the for lamp band up to
the dot and release it. The band will return to its
original position, and the fog lamps will turn off. If you
turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps will
also turn off. They’ll turn back on again when you
switch back to low-beam headlamps.
The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on top of the instrument panel. If you
cover the sensor, it will read dark, and the exterior
lamps or the Headlamps Suggested message will
appear on the DIC whenever the ignition is on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
Instrument Panel Brightness
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to OFF. This protects against draining
the battery in case you have accidentally left the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver does
not work if the headlamps are turned on after the
ignition is turned to OFF.
The lever for this feature is
located on the overhead
console.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on.
Slide the lever toward the symbol to brighten the lights
or away from it to dim them.
If you slide the lever all the way toward the symbol past
the resistance point, the interior lamps will come on.
To turn them off, slide the lever back toward the
minimum brightness setting.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entry Lighting
Reading Lamps
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if you press the remote
keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated by
the transmitter, the lighting will remain active for
about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses the
light sensor; it must be dark outside in order for the
lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They will dim to off if
the ignition key is turned to ON, or immediately
deactivate if the power locks are activated.
The reading lamps are located on the overhead
console. These lamps come on automatically when any
door is opened.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With accessory power outlets, you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel
displays and backlighting during daylight hours when the
key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. This
feature operates with the light sensor and is fully
automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside
and the parking lamps are active, the instrument
panel displays can be adjusted by sliding the instrument
panel brightness lever toward the symbol to brighten
or away from the symbol to dim the lighting.
The front accessory power outlet is located in the
ashtray on the instrument panel below the climate
control system. The outlet will have a cigarette lighter if
your vehicle has this option. Remove the cigarette
lighter to access the outlet.
The rear accessory power outlet is located on the back
of the center console.
The power outlets can be set to be powered all of
the time or to turn off 10 minutes after your vehicle is
shut off. If you desire a change from this setting,
see your dealer for a fuse adjustment.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Ashtray
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
The ashtray is located under the climate control panel
on the instrument panel. Press on the door to release
the ashtray.
To empty the ashtray, remove it from the instrument
panel by gripping the edges and pulling straight out.
To reinstall, push the tray back into place.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray.
The vehicle does not have a cigarette lighter for the rear
seat passengers.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
To use the lighter, press the lighter all the way in and
release it. It will pop back out by itself once the element
has heated for use.
The cigarette lighter outlet can be used to provide
power to accessories. See Accessory Power Outlet(s)
on page 3-21 for more information.
Uplevel Version Shown, Base Similar
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). If you have the Base
have the Navigation system, see “Setup Menu” in the
Index of the CTS/CTS-V Navigation System Owner
Manual.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode,
the air conditioning compressor and the fan speed.
AUTO will appear on the display.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. If you set the system at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will remain in
manual mode at that temperature and it will not go
into automatic mode.
Manual Operation
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up
to maintain the chosen temperature setting.
The length of time needed for warm up will depend
on the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
yN z (Mode): Pressing the mode switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation and
places the system in manual mode. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation.
The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet Adjustment
on page 3-28 to change this airflow from the outboard
outlets.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
h (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more
quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation mode
on or off. The air-conditioning compressor also comes
on. After manually selecting recirculation, the auto button
must be pressed to enable the system to select the
optimum air delivery setting for the vehicle.
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half
of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
Recirculation is not available in the defog or defrost
mode and will automatically turn off after 10 minutes
when defog is selected.
[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows), and a little air directed to
the windshield.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause
the air inside your vehicle to become too dry or stuffy.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in your
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off
or press the auto button.
The mode switch can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
QPWRR (Power/Driver’s Temperature): Press the
PWR button located on the driver’s side of the climate
control panel to turn the entire climate control system
on or off. Press the up or down arrow on the switch
to increase or decrease the temperature inside
your vehicle.
yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and places the system in manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
QPWRR (Power/Passenger’s Temperature): Press
the PWR button located on the passenger’s side of
the climate control panel to allow the passenger’s
climate control setting to be different than the driver’s.
Press the up or down arrow on the switch to increase or
decrease the temperature for the front passenger.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn off the air conditioning compressor. Press
AUTO to return to automatic operation or press the
A/C OFF button again.
Sensors
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the
air inside your vehicle, then use the information to
maintain the selected temperature by initiating needed
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and
the air delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the sensors or the automatic
climate control system will not work properly.
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel,
near the windshield.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
0 (Defrost): Pressing defrost directs most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the
side windows. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off recirculation and run the air-conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
for more information. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
yN z (Mode): Press this button until defog appears
on the display.
- (Defog): This mode directs the air between the
windshield, floor outlets and side windows. When you
select this mode, the system turns off recirculation
and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing. The
recirculation mode is cancelled when you enter defog
mode. If you select recirculation while in defog mode,
it will be cancelled after 10 minutes.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON.
If you have fogging on the side windows, turn the
thumbwheel on the outboard outlets to the side window
for more information.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
j (Side Window Defog): Turn the thumbwheel to this
symbol to use the side window defog setting. The air
coming through the outlets will be directed toward
the side windows to clear fog.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed, but if the vehicle’s speed
is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger will stay
on continuously. If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
open the outlets completely and allow the maximum
amount of air to enter your vehicle. A small amount of air
will still be directed to the side windows.
l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this symbol to
close the outlets and minimize the amount of air entering
the vehicle.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger button is on.
Operation Tips
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or anything else that is
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Outlet Adjustment
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 3-29.
Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheels
to open or close the outlets.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the procedure listed below to replace the passenger
compartment air filter:
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of
the pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs to be changed
periodically. For how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off
again when the wipers are straight up and down
on the windshield.
This will allow you access to the leaf screen under
which is located the passenger compartment air filter.
Using your climate control system without the passenger
air filter installed may allow water or other debris to
enter the system. This could cause a water leak
or noises. Make sure to install a new air filter after
removing the old one.
3. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.
information.
4. Remove the four screws that hold the leaf screen
in place and lift off the screen by lifting and sliding
toward the center of the vehicle.
5. Pull out on the two tabs located on each end of the
filter cover.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling it straight upward.
7. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.
Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward
the passenger compartment.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
information on location.
page 6-15 for the correct part number for the filter.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the cover.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Steering Wheel Climate
Controls (CTS)
Your vehicle may have four controls that can be
programmed for use with the climate control system.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
The controls are located
on the left side of the
steering wheel.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
these controls.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
more information.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.
CTS (United States version shown, Canada similar)
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CTS-V (United States version shown, Canada similar)
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
If your vehicle has to have a new odometer installed,
the new one may read the correct mileage. This is
because your vehicle’s computer has stored the mileage
in memory.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the odometer will change to show the gear range.
more information.
Engine Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the engine from operating at too
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
rpms are too high, the throttle is closed to reduce
speed. If this is not sufficient, then the fuel supply to the
engine will be limited. When the rpms return to
normal, the fuel supply will return to normal. This helps
prevent damage to the engine.
Trip Odometers
The trip odometer can record the number of miles or
kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC), for more information see Status of Vehicle
For vehicles equipped with the navigation system, see
your Navigation System manual for more information.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the chime will not
come on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in your
vehicle, the Service airbag message will appear on the
page 3-61 for more information.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF,
or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. Then, after several more seconds, the
status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the
on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
Charging System Light
When you turn the key to
ON or START, this light will
come on briefly to show
that the generator and
battery charging systems
are working properly.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
page 3-34.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service. You
should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save
your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
For more information see DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-61.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
If the TC (traction control)
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
warning light comes on
and stays on, there may be
a problem with the
traction control system.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,
The TC (traction control) warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition to ON. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
there may be a problem with the anti-lock portion of
the brake system. If the red BRAKE light is not on,
you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock
The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC (traction control) on/off
button located in the glove box for the CTS and on
the steering wheel for the CTS-V.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays
on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on or
comes on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the
system by turning the ignition off then back on. If the
light still stays on or comes back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the traction
control system inspected as soon as possible. See
Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS-V) on page 4-10
for more information.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light (CTS)
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into
the shaded area, the
engine is too hot.
This light tells you that
your engine is very hot.
This light will come on when you first start the vehicle
as a check to let you know that the light is working. It will
go out after a few seconds. If the light does not come
on, the bulb may be burned out. See your dealer for
assistance in changing the bulb.
That reading means the same thing as the warning
light – the engine coolant is very hot. See Engine
If the light does not go out or if the light comes on and
stays on while you are driving, your vehicle may have
a problem with the cooling system. You should stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine. A warning chime
will sound when this light is on, also.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Light
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
If equipped, this light will
come on if the system
detects low tire pressure.
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when the
vehicle is started.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
more information.
For more information on the proper tire pressure,
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may
not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good, and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not
be covered by your warranty.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it
is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
If equipped, this light tells
you if there could be a
problem with your engine
oil pressure.
Oil Pressure Light
The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come
on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if something goes wrong.
{CAUTION:
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
information.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sport Mode Light (Automatic
Transmission/CTS)
Fog Lamp Light
This light will come on
when the fog lamps are
in use.
This light will come on while
the sport mode is in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
When you turn off the sport mode, the light will go out.
If it stays on, your vehicle may need service. See
your dealer. See “Sport Mode” under Automatic
information.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light, see
page 2-18.
information.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Light
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It
works only when the
ignition is in ON.
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
information.
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message
will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.
for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
for more information.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information inside of the speedometer. The lower
button (D) on the inboard switch turns the traction control
page 4-10 for more information.
Message Center
Message Center (CTS-V)
Your vehicle may have a message center that can
display information relating to powertrain fluids,
tire pressures, vehicle dynamics, speedometer and
odometer information, and transmission status. It also
displays warning messages. There are two different
areas where message center information will be
displayed. One display is inside of the tachometer and
the other is inside of the speedometer.
Speedometer Display
This display will show information relating to vehicle
speed, odometer, and transmission status. The
information displayed can be changed by pressing (C).
Pressing this button cycles the displayed information
as follows: digital speedometer only, odometer
only, speedometer and odometer, or blank display.
These are the controls
for the message center.
They are located on the
left spoke of the
When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE (R),
an R will appear in the upper right corner.
During slow speed maneuvers, the engine’s computer
may command the transmission to engage the Skip Shift
feature. For more information see Manual Transmission
steering wheel.
Tachometer Display
Press (B) to cycle through the following displays:
coolant temperature, oil pressure, oil temperature,
transmission temperature, tire pressure, and lateral
acceleration. Press (A) to cycle through the displays in
reverse order. If you press (A) for about one second
the display will become blank.
The outboard switch (A and B) controls the display of
information inside of the tachometer. The upper
button (C) on the inboard switch controls the display of
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The oil pressure will be displayed in psi or kPa and
there will be a graph at the bottom of the display. If the
graph shows the pressure in the shaded area all the
way to the left, then the oil pressure is low. See Engine
on page 3-61 for more information.
Coolant Temperature
When the coolant
temperature is displayed
you will see the coolant
temperature symbol.
Oil Temperature
When the oil temperature
is displayed you will see
the oil temperature symbol.
The temperature will be displayed in degrees Fahrenheit
or Celsius and there will be a graph at the bottom of
the display. If the graph shows the temperature in
the shaded area all the way on the right, then the
page 5-30 for more information.
The temperature will be displayed in degrees Fahrenheit
or Celsius and there will be a graph at the bottom of
the display. If the graph shows the temperature in
the shaded area all the way on the right, then the oil
for more information.
Oil Pressure
When the oil pressure is
displayed you will see the
oil pressure symbol.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Temperature
Lateral Acceleration
Lateral acceleration is a measure of how hard you
are taking a corner. For example, when you are turning
right you will feel your body push to the left. This
force is measured in a “g”. This gage will display from
0.00 g to 1.2 g. The lowest reading means there is
no lateral acceleration. The highest reading means the
force the driver is feeling is 1.2 times the acceleration
due to gravity.
When the transmission
temperature is displayed
you will see the
transmission temperature
symbol.
When (B) is pressed and held while the Lateral
Acceleration display is being shown, the peak hold
values — both tick marks and numbers — will be reset
to zero.
The temperature will be displayed in degrees Fahrenheit
or Celsius and there will be a graph at the bottom of
the display. If the graph shows the temperature in
the shaded area all the way on the right, then the
transmission temperature is hot. See DIC Warnings and
Warning Messages
The warning messages that are described in the
following text are also shown in the tachometer display.
Tire Pressure
While any warning messages are shown,
pressing (A) or (B) will acknowledge the warning and
then display the gage relating to the error message.
For instance, if a tire is below the minimum
recommended pressure, the tire pressure warning
message will blink on and off (5 times for a low tire
warning, continuously for a flat tire warning). The driver
can go to the tire pressure display immediately by
pressing either button on the outboard switch.
When the tire pressure is displayed you will see a
vehicle in the display. The numbers in each corner
represent the tire pressure for the corresponding tire.
The tire pressure will be displayed in psi or kPa.
If any of the tires are blinking on the vehicle in the
display, this means that the tire pressure in that tire is
page 5-69 for more information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Fluid Hot Message
Hot Coolant Temperature
Warning Message
When you see this flashing
symbol, the transmission
fluid temperature is
When you see this flashing
symbol, the engine coolant
temperature is high
(257°F (125°C)).
high (290°F (143°C)).
To acknowledge this warning, press either button on the
outboard switch on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
After you press this button, the warning will redisplay
every 10 minutes until the temperature returns to
the normal operating range. If this message appears,
you may continue to drive at a slower speed while
monitoring the transmission fluid temperature. Ideally,
the transmission oil temperature should not rise
above 265°F (129°C). If you regularly experience
temperatures above this limit due to high performance
operation, it is recommended to use an auxiliary
fluid cooler for the transmission and differential.
See your GM dealer for details. If this warning is
displayed during normal vehicle operation on flat roads,
your vehicle may need service. See your dealer for
an inspection. See DIC Warnings and Messages
page 5-26 for more information.
To acknowledge this warning, press either button on the
outboard switch on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
After you press a button, this warning will redisplay
every 10 minutes until the temperature returns to the
normal operating range. Driving aggressively or
driving on long hills can cause the engine coolant
temperature to be higher than normal. Display of this
warning should correspond with the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light. See Engine Coolant
more information. If this warning is displayed during
normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle may
need service. See your dealer for an inspection.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check Engine Oil Pressure Message Oil Temperature Warning Message
Your vehicle may have this
feature. When you see this
flashing symbol, the
When you see this flashing
symbol, the engine oil
temperature is high.
engine oil pressure is low.
To acknowledge this warning, press either button on the
outboard switch on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
After you press this button, the warning will redisplay
every 10 minutes until the pressure returns to the normal
operating range. Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi
(140 to 550 kPa). In certain situations such as long,
extended idles on hot days, it could read as low as
6 psi (40 kPa) and still be considered normal. It may
vary with engine speed, outside temperature and
oil viscosity. This warning should correspond with the
for more information.
To acknowledge this warning press either button on the
outboard switch on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
After you press a button, the warning will redisplay
every 10 minutes until the temperature returns to the
normal operating range. Driving aggressively or driving
on long hills can cause the engine oil temperature to
be higher than normal. If this warning is displayed during
normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your vehicle may
need service. See your GM dealer for an inspection.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Warning Message
One-to-Four Shift Message
When you see this flashing
If equipped, this message
indicates that you can only
shift from FIRST (1) to
FOURTH (4) instead of
FIRST (1) to SECOND (2).
symbol, one or more of the
vehicle’s tires is either
under or over-inflated.
To acknowledge this warning, press either button on the
outboard switch on the left spoke of the steering wheel.
There are three levels of warning for this display:
You must complete the shift into FOURTH (4) to turn
off this feature. This helps you get the best possible
fuel economy.
1. High Tire Pressure (above 42 psi (290 kPa))
2. Low Tire Pressure (below 25 psi (170 kPa))
3. Flat Tire (below 5 psi (35 kPa))
After shifting to FOURTH (4), you may downshift to a
lower gear if you prefer.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear except
FOURTH (4) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes
on may damage the transmission. Shift only from
FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) when the light comes on.
For conditions 1 and 2, this warning will flash five times
and the display will then show the tire pressure gage.
For condition 3, this warning will flash continuously until
the driver acknowledges it. In any of the three cases,
the warning will redisplay every 10 minutes until the
situation is corrected. Conditions 2 and 3 will also
display a warning light elsewhere on the cluster that will
stay illuminated after this warning is acknowledged.
page 5-69 for more information on tire pressure
specifications.
This message will come on when:
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169°F (76°C),
• you are going 15 to 19 mph (24 to 31 km/h) and
• you are 21 percent throttle or less.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Controls
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC gives you the status of many of your vehicle’s
systems. It is also used to display driver personalization
features and warning/status messages. All messages
will appear on the audio system display.
If your vehicle has the Base audio system, use the
information contained in this manual for instructions on
operating the DIC for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see the
Navigation system manual for instructions on operating
the DIC for your vehicle.
Use the following controls located on the audio system
to operate the DIC:
INFO (Information): Use the up or down arrows on this
switch to scroll through the system status information.
CLR (Clear): Press this button to clear DIC messages
and to reset some DIC displays to zero. This button
is also used to exit out of a menu. See DIC Warnings
TUNE/SEL (Select) Knob: To scroll through the menu
items displayed, turn the knob, located in the lower
right corner. Press the knob to select the menu item.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• ENGINE OIL LIFE*
Status of Vehicle Systems
• TRANS FLUID LIFE* (Automatic Transmission Only)
• PSI LF TIRE (KPA LF TIRE)
• PSI RF TIRE (KPA RF TIRE)
• PSI RR TIRE (KPA RR TIRE)
• PSI LR TIRE (KPA LR TIRE)
• BLANK LINE
You can view the status of several vehicle systems
using the DIC.
Vehicle Information Menu
To access this menu, press the up or down arrow on
the INFO switch located to the right of the display.
The following items are available when the ignition is in
ON. These items will not be available when the ignition
is in ACCESSORY. The tire pressure menu items
are only available if your vehicle has the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system:
*These items can be reset. Each one must be reset
individually. For a detailed description of the menu items
and how to reset them, see “Vehicle Information Menu
Item Descriptions” later in this section.
• OUTSIDE TEMP
You can view any of these items at any time, but only
one item can be displayed at a time.
• MI TRIP A (KM TRIP A)*
• MI TRIP B (KM TRIP B)*
• MILES RANGE (KM RANGE)
• MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG)*
• MPG INST (L/100 KM INST)
• GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)*
• AVG MPH (AVG KM/H)*
• TIMER*
Vehicle Information Menu Item
Descriptions
The following paragraphs contain a more detailed
description of each menu item:
OUTSIDE TEMP: If you select this item, the current
outside temperature is displayed at the top of the
screen. It will be in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C) depending upon whether the
system is set for English or metric units. If you wish to
• BATTERY VOLTS
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MI TRIP A and B (KM TRIP A and B): For information
MPG INST (L/100 KM INST): If you select this item,
the current fuel economy is displayed. This number
reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle has right
now and will change frequently as driving conditions
change. Unlike average fuel economy, this menu item
cannot be reset.
MILES RANGE (KM RANGE): If you select this item,
the approximate number of remaining miles or
kilometers you can drive without refueling is displayed.
This estimate is based on the current driving conditions
and will change if the driving conditions change. For
example, if you are driving in traffic making frequent
stops, the display may read one number, but if you enter
the freeway, the number may change even though
you still have the same amount of gas in the gas tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED): If you select this
item, the number of gallons or liters of fuel used
since the last reset of this menu item is displayed.
To reset GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED), press the
CLR button located to the right of the screen. The
display will return to zero.
AVG MPH (AVG KM/H): If you select this item, the
average speed of the vehicle is displayed in miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average
is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds
recorded since the last reset of this menu item.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level Low” under
information.
To reset AVG MPH (AVG KM/H), press the CLR button
located to the right of the screen. The display will
return to zero.
MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG): If you select this item, the
approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) is displayed. This number
is calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was reset.
TIMER: If you select this item, a timing feature is
displayed. The timer functions like a stopwatch in that
you can record the time it takes to travel from one point
to another.
To reset the MPG AVG (L/100 KM AVG), press the
CLR button located to the right of the screen. The
display will return to zero.
To turn on the timer, press the CLR button located to
the right of the screen once. The display will read
00:00:00 TIMER ON and begin counting.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off the timer, press the CLR button again. When
the timer is off, the display will show the timer value
and TIMER OFF. The timing feature will stop.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life system separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life system, see “How to
Reset the Engine Oil Life System and the Oil Life
If you clear the Change Engine Oil message from
the display, it will not re-appear.
To reset the timer, turn off the timer and then press and
hold the CLR button. The display will return to zero.
BATTERY VOLTS: If you select this item, the current
battery voltage is displayed. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the display will have OK after it.
For example, the display may read 13.2 BATTERY
VOLTS OK.
TRANS FLUID LIFE (Automatic Transmission): If you
select this item, the percentage of remaining
transmission fluid life is displayed. If you see 99%
TRANS FLUID LIFE on the display, that means that 99%
of the current transmission fluid life remains.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
there are four possible DIC messages that may be
page 3-61 for more information.
When the transmission fluid life is depleted, the Change
Trans Fluid message will appear on the display. You
should change the transmission fluid as soon as
possible. Be sure to keep a written record of the mileage
and date of the fluid change so you will have it for
page 6-13 for more information.
ENGINE OIL LIFE: If you select this item, the
percentage of remaining oil life is displayed. If you see
99% ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display, that means
that 99% of the current oil life remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
message will appear on the display. See your GM dealer
for service. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message
by clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
transmission fluid life monitor separately. For more
information on resetting the transmission fluid life
page 5-25.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LF TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side front
tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is low,
LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in pounds per square inch (PSI) or
kilopascals (KPA). To change the units, see DIC
DIC Main Menu
Accessing the DIC Main Menu
To access the main menu of the DIC, do the following:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
RF TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s side
front tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is
low, LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in pounds per square inch (PSI) or
kilopascals (KPA). To change the units, see DIC Main
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through the menu items.
The DIC main menu consists of the following menu items:
• e BASS - MID - TREBLE
• e EQ
RR TIRE: If you select this item, the passenger’s
side rear tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire
pressure is low, LOW will be displayed with this item.
The pressure can be displayed in pounds per square
inch (PSI) or kilopascals (KPA). To change the units,
• DSP (Bose® Radio)
• AVC (Bose® Radio)
• H/A
• AUTOSTORE PRESETS
• CAT
LR TIRE: If you select this item, the driver’s side rear
tire pressure will be displayed. If the tire pressure is low,
LOW will be displayed with this item. The pressure
can be displayed in pounds per square inch (PSI) or
kilopascals (KPA). To change the units, see DIC
• TA
• MSG RECALL RDS MESSAGE
• AF
• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
BLANK LINE: If you select this item, nothing is
displayed at the top of the screen.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the desired choice is displayed, turn the knob to
set your DSP choice and continue scrolling through the
main menu.
• 9 (English/Metric Units)
• TCS
• 8 (Clock)
more information.
• 8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display)
• SETUP
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): If your
vehicle has a Bose® radio, this menu item allows you
to turn the AVC feature on and off. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob once to turn AVC on and off. When AVC is on,
an X will be in the box next to AVC on the menu. The X
disappears when AVC is off.
DIC Main Menu Item Descriptions
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This menu
item allows you to adjust the levels for the bass,
midrange, treble, balance, and fade features of the
audio system. For more information, see “Setting the
Tone (Bass/Treble)” and “Adjusting the Speakers
See “AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation)” under
H/A (Home/Away Preset Stations): This menu item
allows you to switch back and forth between your home
and away preset radio stations. Press the TUNE/SEL
knob to switch between home and away.
e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item allows you to
choose among five preset equalizations for the audio
page 3-85 for more information.
page 3-85 for more information.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): If your vehicle has a
Bose® radio, this menu item allows you to select the DSP
type that you want on the audio system. You may choose
Normal, Talk, Spacious, Rear Seat or Driver Seat. Press
the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through these choices.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item allows you to
automatically store radio stations with the strongest
signals as presets. See “Setting Preset Stations” under
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to select
radio stations based on preset categories. To turn
the CAT feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once.
When CAT is on, an X will be in the box next to CAT on
the menu. The X disappears when CAT is off.
See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS and
information.
A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs the
audio system to seek only local radio stations with the
strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a strong
signal in a large area. Use LOCAL when you are in
urban areas where there are several strong radio station
signals and you want to limit the number of stations to
those with the strongest signals only. Use DISTANT
when you are in rural areas where there are fewer radio
station signals available.
See “Activating Category (CAT) Stations (RDS and
information.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item allows
you to turn the TA feature on and off. To turn the
TA feature on, press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When
TA is on, an X will be in the box next to TA on the
menu. The X disappears when TA is off.
To switch between LOCAL and DISTANT, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is displayed, turn the
knob to set your choice and continue scrolling through
the main menu.
page 3-85 for more information.
MSG (Message) RECALL RDS (Radio Data System)
MESSAGE: This menu item allows you to view an
RDS radio station message broadcast by a radio station.
To view the message, press the TUNE/SEL knob
once. The message will appear on the screen.
9 (English/Metric Units): Use this menu item to
adjust the measurement units.
You can choose between ENGLISH UNITS and
METRIC UNITS. To switch between the two, press the
TUNE/SEL knob. Once your choice is displayed,
turn the knob to set your choice and continue scrolling
through the main menu.
page 3-85 for more information.
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item allows you
to turn the AF feature on and off. To turn on AF,
press the TUNE/SEL knob once. When AF is on, an X
will be in the box next to AF on the menu. The X
disappears when AF is off.
The measurement units that you choose will be reflected
on all the vehicle system displays, not just the DIC
information. For example, the climate control panel will
display degrees Celsius if you choose METRIC UNITS.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCS (Traction Control System): You can enable or
disable the traction control system using this menu item.
Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on and off.
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the following
submenu is available:
• LANGUAGE
You can also turn the traction control system off using
the traction control button located in the glove box,
or by programming one of the steering wheel
controls (1, 2, 3, or 4) or audio system soft keys to
enable/disable the TCS. See Reconfigurable Steering
“Configurable Radio Display Keys” under Radio with CD
on page 3-85 for more information.
• PERSONALIZATION
• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
• CONFIGURE SWC (Steering Wheel Control) KEYS
To change the language displayed on the radio,
select LANGUAGE by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob.
Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the available
languages and press the knob to make your selection.
If you accidentally select a language that you did not
want, ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list.
When you disable the traction control system, the traction
control system warning light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. See Traction Control System (TCS)
For more information on the other items in the SETUP
page 3-7.
8 (Clock): Use this menu item to set the time on
the clock.
8 / 4 (Clock/Information Display): Use this menu
item to toggle between the clock display and the XM™
Information (Song, Artist, Album), if available.
for more information.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until BATTERY VOLTS appears.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the CLR button.
Battery Voltage High
This message indicates that the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the system
detects that the battery voltage is above approximately
16 volts, this message will be displayed.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the screen
seriously and remember that clearing the message
will only make the message disappear, not the problem.
Battery Not Charging
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and radio,
set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed
on the highest setting, and turn the rear window
defogger on.
When this message appears on the display, there is
a problem with the generator and battery charging
systems. Have the electrical system checked by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
when the engine is running. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button
until BATTERY VOLTS appears.
Battery Saver Active
This message appears when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle which you may not be able to
notice. At the point that the features are disabled,
this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is
trying to save the charge in the battery.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the
passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their seat belt.
Battery Voltage Low
This message will appear when the electrical system
is charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has
been drained.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning
home or to a final destination. Make sure you follow
the manufacturer’s instructions.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
Buckle Seat Belt
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked by your
GM dealer immediately to determine the cause of
this problem.
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
seat belt.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your seat belt.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is on
and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled, this
message and chime will not come on.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the INFO button until BATTERY VOLTS appears.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster.
information.
Buckle Passenger
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
seat belt.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change Engine Oil
Check Brake Fluid
This message indicates that the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed and that
your vehicle is due for service. See your GM dealer.
This message will display if the ignition is in ON to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake
system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
When you reset the Change Engine Oil message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
engine oil life system separately. For more information
on resetting the engine oil life system, see Engine
from the display, it will not re-appear.
Check Coolant Level
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid
(Automatic Transmission)
This message will appear when there is a low level of
engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced
by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See Engine
This message indicates that the life of the transmission
fluid has expired and it should be changed. See
the proper fluid and change intervals.
Check Gas Cap
When this message appears on the display, the gas cap
has not been fully tightened. You should recheck the
gas cap to ensure that it is on and tightened properly.
See “If the Light Is On Steady” under Malfunction
When you reset the Change Trans Fluid message by
clearing it from the display, you still must reset the
transmission fluid life monitor separately. For more
information on resetting the transmission fluid life
page 5-25.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check Tire Pressure
Driver Door Ajar
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message indicates that one or more of the
vehicle’s tires are low. See Status of Vehicle Systems
on page 3-54 for information on checking your vehicle’s
tire pressures. Also, see Tire Pressure Monitor
page 5-66 for more information.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s door was not closed completely.
You should make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
Engine Coolant Hot – AC (Air
Conditioning) Off
Check Washer Fluid
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid.
You should refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir
as soon as possible. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39 for more information.
Competitive Driving (CTS-V)
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine or transmission.
When competitive driving mode is turned on with the
TC (traction control) button, this message will be
displayed on the DIC. The TC light will be on when the
competitive driving mode is on. The traction control
system will not operate while in competitive driving mode.
You should adjust your driving accordingly. See the
CTS-V portion of Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS)
on page 4-10 for more information.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Hot – Idle Engine
Engine Power Reduced
This message informs you that the vehicle is reducing
engine power to try to protect the engine or transmission
from damage due to extreme operating conditions.
This also can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-30 for more information.
Fuel Level Low
When this message appears on the display, it means
that your vehicle is low on fuel. You should refill the fuel
tank as soon as possible. A single chime will sound
when this message is displayed.
This message will appear when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down.
Headlamps Suggested
Engine Overheated – Stop Engine
This message will appear when the amount of available
light outside the vehicle is low and the exterior lamp
control is off. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even
though the daytime running lamps (DRL) are still
illuminated and it has become dark enough outside to
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-30 for more information.
This message will also appear when the windshield
wipers have been on for more than six seconds and
the exterior lamp control is off or in the parking
lamp position.
This message will appear when the engine has
overheated. Stop the vehicle and turn the engine off
immediately to avoid severe engine damage. See
sound when this message is displayed.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ice Possible
Right Rear Door Ajar
This message appears when the outside temperature is
cold enough to create icy road conditions.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the passenger’s side rear door was not closed
completely. You should check to make sure that
the door is closed completely.
Left Rear Door Ajar
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the driver’s side rear door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Service AC (Air Conditioning) System
This message appears when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
Oil Pressure Low – Stop Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
Service Air Bag
There is a problem with the airbag system when this
message appears. Have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-34 for more information.
Service Brake Assist
Passenger Door Ajar
This message will display when a problem with the panic
brake assist system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the passenger’s side front door was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the door
is closed completely.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on, or comes
back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® system inspected by
Service Charging System
This message will display when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
Service Electrical System
This message will display if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or
the ignition switch. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer.
Service Steering System
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
Service Fuel System
This message will be displayed if a problem is detected
with the speed variable assist steering system. When
this message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected a
problem within the fuel system when this message
appears. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
Service Idle Control
Service Theft System
A problem with the idle control has occurred when this
message displays. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer.
This message means there is a problem with the
information. A fault has been detected in the system,
which means that the system is disabled and is not
protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts,
however, you may want to take your vehicle to your
GM dealer before turning off the engine.
Service Stability System
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will be
displayed if there has been a problem detected
with StabiliTrak®.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Tire Monitor System
Stability System Off
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will appear if the TPM system is
not working properly. Have your vehicle serviced at
your GM dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will be
displayed any time you turn off StabiliTrak® using the
TC (traction control) on/off button. See Traction Control
information. When this message has been displayed,
StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist you
with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Service Transmission
This message will display if there is a problem with
the transmission of your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
Stability System Ready
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will be
displayed any time you turn StabiliTrak® on again using
the TC (traction control) on/off button. See Traction
more information. When this message has been
displayed, StabiliTrak® is ready to assist you with
directional control of the vehicle, if needed.
Service Vehicle Soon
This message is displayed when a non-emissions
related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
Stability System Engaged
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will be
displayed any time StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you
with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message
may stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak® stops
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
information.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Disabled – Remove Key
Traction Engaged
This message will appear when the vehicle
This message will appear when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will
stay on for a few seconds after the traction control
system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control
information.
theft-deterrent system detects that an improper ignition
key is being used to try to start the vehicle. Check
the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it may need
to be replaced. If it is not damaged, remove the key
and try to start the vehicle again. If it still does not start,
try another ignition key or have your vehicle serviced
by your GM dealer.
Starting Disabled – Throttle Problem
Trans (Transmission) Hot – Idle Engine
This message appears when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
This message indicates that the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to
idle until the transmission cools down or until this
message is removed. See also Transmission Fluid Hot
Theft Attempted
This message is displayed if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle.
Trunk Open
When this message appears on the display, it means
that the trunk lid of your vehicle was not closed
completely. You should make sure that the trunk lid is
closed completely.
Top Speed – Fuel Cut Off
This message will appear when the Engine Control
Module (ECM) detects that the maximum speed for your
vehicle has been reached. Your vehicle’s top speed is
based on the top speed rating of the tires. This ensures
that your vehicle stays in a safe operating range for
the tires.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On
Entering the Personalization Menu
If you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message will appear
as a reminder to turn off the turn signal. A multiple
chime will sound when this message is displayed.
To enter the feature programming mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the engine.
Make sure an automatic transmission is in PARK (P)
or a manual transmission has the parking brake set.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver’s door armrest. The DIC display will show
either Driver 1 or 2 depending on which button
was selected.
Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to
program certain features to a preferred setting for up to
two people. The number of programmable features
varies depending upon which model of the vehicle is
purchased.
On all vehicles, features such as climate control settings,
radio preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock, remote
lock and unlock confirmation, and automatic door locks
have already been programmed for your convenience.
Some vehicles have additional features that can be
programmed including the seat and outside rearview
mirror position.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the main
menu of the DIC.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP is
highlighted.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to access the
SETUP menu.
6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until the feature you want
to change is highlighted, then press the TUNE/SEL
knob to turn the feature on or off. If the feature
is turned on, a check mark will appear next to the
feature name.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences are
recalled by pressing the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, 1 or 2, or by pressing the
appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on the
driver’s door. Certain features can be programmed
not to recall until the key is placed in the ignition.
To change feature preferences, see “Entering the
Personalization Menu” following.
If none of the personalization items are turned on,
turn on the personalization menu by pressing
the TUNE/SEL knob. The list of features will then
appear, and you can repeat Step 6.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob once to select the letter.
The letter will then appear on the display.
Personalization Features
The following choices are available for programming:
If you make a mistake, press the CLR button. This
will exit the menu. You can then go back into the
menu and edit the name. You can also press
the TUNE/SEL knob repeatedly to cycle through all
the characters until you reach the character you
wish to change.
Personalization Name
This feature allows you to type in a name that will
appear on the DIC display whenever the corresponding
remote keyless entry transmitter is used or one of the
buttons on the driver’s door armrest (1 or 2) is pressed.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the name you want is
complete. You can program up to 16 characters.
If a customized name is not programmed, the system
will show DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 to correspond with the
numbers on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitters.
The name you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
To program a name, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the Personalization menu following the
instructions listed previously.
Configure Display Keys
This feature allows you to customize the functions of the
four soft keys located to the left and right of the audio
display. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” under
information.
2. Select the PERSONALIZATION NAME menu item
by pressing the TUNE/SEL knob once.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
3. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until you reach the first
letter you want. The letter will be highlighted. There
is a complete alphabet with both upper and lower
case letters and the numbers zero through nine.
Also included are spaces and other non-letter
characters such as the ampersand (&).
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Configure SWC (Steering Wheel
Controls) Keys
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
This feature allows you to customize the functions of the
four steering wheel controls located on the left spoke
of the steering wheel. See Reconfigurable Steering
programming information.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE RECALL
MEMORY is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Remote Recall Memory
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on,
you can recall any previously programmed seat
and mirror controls when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
If this feature is selected, Remote Exit Recall or Key In
Recall Memory cannot be selected.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Remote Exit Recall
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Key in Recall Memory
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on,
you can recall any previously programmed seat and
mirror positions when the key is inserted into the ignition.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until REMOTE EXIT
RECALL is highlighted.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until KEY IN RECALL
MEMORY is highlighted.
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory
cannot be selected.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this feature is selected, Remote Recall Memory
cannot be selected.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Auto Exit Seat
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on,
you can recall any previously programmed exit position
for the driver’s seat when the key is removed from the
ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
Twilight Delay
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds
Mode 2: 0:15 seconds
Mode 3: 0:30 seconds
Mode 4: 1:00 minute
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 2:30 minutes
Mode 8: 3:00 minutes
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO EXIT SEAT is
highlighted.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since the
vehicle left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is
programmed or to program the vehicle to a different
mode, use the following procedure:
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TWILIGHT DELAY
is highlighted.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through and
select the available delay settings.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will not
illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one mode
can be selected at a time.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Lights Flash at Unlock
This feature flashes the exterior lamps when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
The lamps will flash for approximately 20 seconds
unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY, ON, or START, or the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can select this feature by itself, or you can combine
it with Horn Sounds At Lock so that both the lights
flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle.
Lights Flash at Lock
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once
when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature
to work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking
lamps or headlamps are on.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either
exit the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Horn Sounds at Lock
This feature sounds the horn once when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
All doors must be closed for this feature to work.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Mode 2: OFF
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until HORN SOUNDS AT
LOCK is highlighted.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
If you select this feature to be on, Lights Flash At Lock
will also be on. You can choose Lights Flash At Lock
by itself, but Horn Sounds At Lock will always have
Lights Flash At Lock enabled when it is selected.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EXT. LIGHT AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
Exterior Lights at Unlock
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle. The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds
unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY, ON, or START, or the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock Key Out/Off,
Doors Unlock Key Out/Off, or Doors Unlock in Park
cannot be selected.
Driver Unlock in Park
(Automatic Transmission Only)
The feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Driver Unlock Key Out (Automatic
Transmission Only)/Driver Unlock Key Off
(Manual Transmission Only)
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the key is removed from the ignition
on automatic transmission vehicles or when the ignition
is turned to OFF for manual transmission vehicles.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Mode 2: OFF
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on
and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
If this feature is selected, Driver Unlock in Park
(automatic transmission), Doors Unlock in Park
(automatic transmission), or Doors Unlock Key Out/Off
cannot be selected.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
Doors Unlock in Park (Automatic
Transmission Only)
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock Key Out/Off,
Driver Unlock Key Out/Off, or Driver Unlock in Park
(automatic transmission) cannot be selected.
The feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this feature is selected, Doors Unlock in Park
(automatic transmission), Driver Unlock in Park
(automatic transmission), or Driver Unlock Key Out/Off
cannot be selected.
Doors Unlock Key Out (Automatic
Transmission Only)/ Doors Unlock Key Off
(Manual Transmission Only)
This feature allows the doors to automatically unlock
when the key is removed from the ignition on automatic
transmission vehicles or when the ignition is turned
to OFF on manual transmission vehicles.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Delayed Locking
Mode 1: ON
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
up to five seconds after a power door lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed. The five second delay occurs after the
last door is closed.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Mode 2: OFF
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DOORS UNLOCK
KEY OUT/OFF is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch between on
and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
Mode 2: OFF
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until DELAYED LOCKING
is highlighted.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until LOCK PASS
WINDOW is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Lock Passenger Window
This feature allows you to disable either all the passenger
window switches or the rear passenger window switches
only. If this feature is turned on, all passenger window
switches will be disabled when the window lockout button
is pressed. If the feature is off, only the rear passenger
window switches will be disabled. See Power Windows
on page 2-15 for more information.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Mirror to Curb in Reverse
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, the
passenger’s outside rearview mirror will move downward
so you can view the curb when the shift lever is shifted
into REVERSE (R). The mirror will return to the last
known driving position when the shift lever is moved out
of REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View Assist
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Enhanced Chime Volume
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the
vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannot
be turned off, only adjusted.
Mode 2: OFF
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL
Mode 2: LOUD
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it
left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until MIRROR TO CURB
IN REV is highlighted.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Audio System(s)
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
1. Enter the personalization portion of the SETUP
menu following the instructions listed previously.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ENHANCED CHIME
VOLUME is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to switch back and forth
between the normal and loud settings.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Exiting the Personalization Menu
{CAUTION:
To exit the personalization portion of the SETUP menu,
press the CLR button once you have finished making
your selections. You will return to the main audio screen.
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
If a 15 second time period has elapsed with no selection
made, the SETUP menu will be exited automatically.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system
so you can use it with less effort and take full advantage
of its features.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before installing it.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite
radio stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the
speakers. Then, when driving conditions permit, you
can tune to your favorite radio stations using the
presets and steering wheel controls (if equipped).
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find out
what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Time
Radio with CD
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SET CLOCK
appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the
display.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” under
configuring the keys.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,
including song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
CLOCK/INFO DISP (Clock/Information
Display): Press the CLOCK/INFO DISP button to
switch between the clock display, the XM™ screen, and
the XM™ information display.
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Press this button while in XM™ mode to retrieve three
different categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, and Category.
To view this information, perform the following:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
DISP appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select CLOCK/INFO
DISP. The display will change to show the additional
XM™ information.
4. To return to the original display, press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous United States and in
Canada (if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast
to coast channels including music, news, sports, talk,
and children’s programming.
If the CLOCK/INFO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys” later in this
section for more information.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to turn AVC on or off.
An X will appear in the box when AVC is selected on.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source, either
radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the
source and to play. CD will appear on the display if a
CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded the display will
not change from the radio source.
AVC (Automatic Volume Compensation): Available
only with the premium Bose® audio system. AVC, which
utilizes Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation
technology, continuously adjusts the audio system
equalization, to compensate for background noise, so
that your music always sounds the same at the set
volume level. This feature is most effective at lower radio
volume settings where background noise can affect
how well you hear the music being played through your
vehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings,
where the music is much louder than the background
noise, there may be little or no adjustments by AVC.
To turn AVC on and off, perform the following steps:
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
SEEK will appear on the display. The sound will mute
while seeking.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTO VOLUME
COMP. appears on the display.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select either LOCAL
or DISTANT.
Q SCAN R: Press the SCAN button to enter scan
mode. SCAN will appear on the display. Press the
up arrow to scan to the next station. The radio will go
to a station, play for 5 seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press this button again to stop scanning.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
To search for stations, press the SEEK up or down
arrows. If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK will appear
in the display and seek to stations with strong signals
only. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK will
appear in the display and seek to stations with weak and
strong signals.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep and PSCAN
appears on the display. The radio will go to the
first preset station stored on your firm keys, play for
5 seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
SCAN again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered firm keys, by performing the
following steps:
LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature you can
set the radio to search for local stations or stations that
are further away for a larger selection. To set this feature
to LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or XM1
or XM2.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SEEK LOCAL or
SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.
3. Tune in the desired station.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered firm keys for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The set preset
station number will appear on the display above the
firm key that it is set to. Whenever that numbered
firm key is pressed for less than two seconds, the
station that was set will return.
The stations will be stored by signal strength, not
sequential order. The set preset station number will
appear on the display above the firm key that it
is set to. Whenever that numbered firm key is
pressed for less than two seconds, the station that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each firm key.
6. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP setting, or a PTY setting, see each of
these features later in this section. When a
preset station is selected, once one of these
additional settings is selected, the preset station will
remember each setting and it will remain active,
until the setting is selected off for that preset station.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets.
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you the
ability to store two different kinds of station presets.
HOME can be used for stations available where you live
and AWAY can be for stations available outside of
your local broadcasting area. To set preset stations for
home and away perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until PRESETS
HOME/AWAY appears on the display.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset stations
automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. HOME or
AWAY will appear on the display.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS appears on the display.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select. AUTOSTORE
will appear on the display. The radio will
automatically search the band and select and store
the six radio stations with the strongest signal.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed
for setting the preset firm keys for both home and away.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the equalization
setting. The equalization setting will appear on
the display.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform the
following steps:
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),
EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),
and EQ5 (Country).
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone settings.
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll through the
settings.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to increase or to decrease
the bass, midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the adjustment.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the tone
settings.
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform the
following steps:
4. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to scroll to BALANCE or
FADER.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until EQUALIZER
appears on the display.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to adjust the BALANCE
to the right or the left speakers and the FADER to
the front or the rear speakers.
DSP NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall
audio performance for all passengers. DSP NORMAL
will not appear on the display when in this mode.
6. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to set the adjustment.
TALK: This setting should be used when listening
to non-musical material such as news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts, and books on tape. Talk makes
spoken words sound very clear.
7. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
EQ0 will not appear on the display when in this mode.
SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the listening
space seem larger.
Using DSP
REAR SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give the
rear seat passenger(s) the best possible sound quality.
Sound quality for the front seat passengers may be
different when this setting is used.
Available only with the premium Bose® audio system,
this feature is used to provide a choice of five different
listening experiences: DSP normal, talk, spacious, rear
seat, and driver seat. DSP can be used while listening
to the radio or the CD player. The radio keeps separate
DSP settings for each band, preset, and source.
DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give
the driver the best possible sound quality. Sound quality
for the front and rear seat passenger(s) may be
different when this setting is used.
To select a DSP choice, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until one of the
five settings appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select a DSP setting.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To display the last message, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
RDS Messages
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.
When, an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station or a related network station, ALERT will
appear on the display. You will hear the announcement,
even if the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD
is playing, play will stop during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off. If the radio tunes
to a related network station for the announcement, it
will return to the original station when the announcement
is finished.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CLOCK/INFO
DISP appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob. The message will
appear on the display.
Once the message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the display
when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that
has traffic announcement broadcast capability.
ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on the
display, the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements and when a traffic announcement
comes on the tuned station you will hear it.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. The message
may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers,
etc. If the entire message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every
three seconds until the message is completed. Once
the completed message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
when TA is turned on it will seek to a station that
does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and
TA will appear on the display. If no station is found
that broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traffic will
appear on the display.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio will play traffic announcements if the volume
is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
Once CAT is activated the categories will appear on the
display above the firm keys, in place of the preset
stations, if programmed. Press the firm key for the
category that you would like to listen to. Not all stations
support CAT. The radio may not go to all of the stations
with that music type when pressing the firm key.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until TRAFFIC
ANNOUNCE appears on the display.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when TA is selected on.
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows
the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same category.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until ALTERNATE
FREQ. appears on the display.
Activating Category (CAT) Stations
(RDS and XM™)
CAT allows you to search for stations with specific types
of music. The selectable categories are POP, EASY,
TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select AF OFF,
AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the box
when AF is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
To activate program types, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CATEGORY
appears on the display.
Radio Message
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select ON or OFF.
An X will appear in the box when CAT is selected on.
4. Press the CLR button to exit the display. To return
to the original display, repeatedly press the CLR
button or wait for the display to time out.
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has been activated. Take
the vehicle to the dealer for service.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Title Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No CAT Info
Not Found
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
No Information
XM Lock
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM Receiver
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Using the Single CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a soft marker instead.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on the
CD will begin playing. A CD may be loaded with the radio
off but it will not start playing until the radio is on.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the firm keys, in place of the preset
stations (if programmed).
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see “Care of Your CDs” later in this section.
F1 PREV (Previous): Press this firm key to go to the
previous track. Press and hold this firm key to reverse
quickly within a track. Release the firm key to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F2 NEXT: Press this firm key to go to the next track.
Press and hold this firm key to advance quickly within
a track. Release the firm key to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
F3 RDM (Random): Press this firm key to listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play. RANDOM will disappear
from the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see “Care of Your CDs” later in this section.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this firm key to hear a track
over again. REPEAT will appear on the display.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT will
disappear from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display the
time of the track. Press this firm key again to remove the
time of the track from the display.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a soft marker instead.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track on the CD.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Q SCAN R: Press this button to listen to each track
for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
X (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject may
be activated with the ignition and the radio off.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted the CD functions will appear on
the display above the firm keys, in place of the preset
stations, if programmed.
Do not try to load two CDs at one time and wait to
load a CD until INSERT appears on the display
for each disc inserted. The CD player will take up to
six CDs. Do not try to load more than six. If you
want to load less than six CDs, load the desired
amount. The CD player will time out when it
does not receive any more CDs and the last CD
loaded will begin to play.
LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release the LOAD button. Please Wait
will appear on the display.
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to play
automatically.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
F1 CD n(Down): Press this firm key to go to the
previous CD.
When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display,
the number of the CD and the track number will
appear on the display if the radio is on.
F2 CD m(Up): Press this firm key to go to the next CD.
CD REV {(Reverse): Press this firm key to go to the
previous track. Press and hold this firm key to reverse
quickly within the track. Release the firm key to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
Please Wait will appear on the display and you will
hear a beep.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• RDM TRK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM TRK will appear on the display. Press
the MODE firm key again to turn off random play.
RDM TRK will disappear from the display.
CD FWD |(Forward): Press this firm key to go to the
next track. Press and hold this firm key to advance
quickly within the track. Release the firm key to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM ALL will appear on the display. Press the
MODE firm key again to turn off random play.
RDM ALL will disappear from the display.
F5 MODE: Press this firm key to select from NORMAL,
RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT CD (Repeat CD), RDM
TRK (Random Track), and RDM ALL (Random All CDs).
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of the
CD(s). NORMAL will not appear on the display when
in this mode.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this firm key to display the
time of the track. Press this firm key again to display
CD PLAY and press this firm key once more to clear the
display.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK will appear on the display. Press
the MODE firm key again to turn off repeat play.
RPT TRCK will disappear from the display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track on the CD.
• RPT CD (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over again.
RPT DISC will appear on the display. Press the
MODE firm key again to turn off repeat play.
RPT DISC will disappear from the display.
Q SCAN: Press this button to listen to each track for
10 seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD that is
currently playing, or press and hold this button to eject
all of the CDs loaded. You will hear a beep. Eject
may be activated with the ignition or radio off.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Configurable Radio Display Keys
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
This feature allows you to customize the four keys that
are located on each side of the radio display to make
it easier to adjust the radio features and other non-radio
related features are also available for customization.
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
To program the configurable radio display keys, perform
the following steps:
• If you are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
1. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter the main menu.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
2. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until SETUP appears
on the display.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
3. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into SETUP.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
4. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
5. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to enter into
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
6. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to select which of the
four configurable keys you would like to change.
The currently assigned feature will be shown.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Press the TUNE/SEL knob to select the configurable
key to change.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
8. Turn the TUNE/SEL knob to find the feature that
you would like to store to the key.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the navigation system manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
9. Press the TUNE/SEL knob when you have found
the feature to be stored. The display will update,
by showing the symbol of the feature that you
selected next to the configurable key.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature will
not appear on the display when programming the
remaining configurable keys. The configurable keys can
be changed at any time.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate. If the radio is removed from
your vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be
used to trace the radio back to your vehicle.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press this button to
silence the system. Press this button again or turn the
VOL knob to turn the sound on.
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls (CTS)
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for more
information.
Some audio functions can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
See Reconfigurable
(SWC) (CTS) on page 3-7
for more information on
this feature.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the
volume.
e(Band/Source): Press this button to switch
between FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped),
radio, or CD.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
For vehicles with the six-disc CD changer radio: If none
of the audio sources are loaded, and this button is
pressed, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on
the display.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations will boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
is an increased level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Care of Your CDs
FM Stereo
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface
of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts from
the center to the edge.
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of XM
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellular
telephone antenna does not touch a grid line.
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be
covered by your warranty.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or anything else that is
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up
stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
CAUTION: (Continued)
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level
of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) (CTS)
on page 4-10.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This warning light will come
on to let you know if there’s
a problem with your traction
control system.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may
hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
page 3-39. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best braking.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. Additionally, turning the traction control system
off on some surfaces, such as deep snow and loose
gravel, will assist vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
for information on using TCS when driving in snowy
or icy conditions.
Traction Control
System (TCS) (CTS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that
one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning
to lose traction. When this happens, the system
brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can turn the
Traction Control
System (TCS) (CTS-V)
system off by pressing
the TC (traction control)
button located in the
glove box.
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that
one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning
to lose traction. When this happens, the system
brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
If you press the TC button once, the traction control
system will turn off and the traction control system
warning light will come on. Press the TC button again
to turn the system back on. If you press and hold
the TC button for five seconds, the StabiliTrak® system
will turn off. Press the TC button again to turn
StabiliTrak® back on. For more information, see
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
This warning light will come
on to let you know if there’s
a problem with your traction
control system.
You can program your steering wheel controls and/or
the buttons on the Base audio system to turn the
TCS on or off. See Reconfigurable Steering Wheel
for programming instructions.
page 3-39. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But you can turn the traction
control system off if you ever need to. You should turn
the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in
sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.
Additionally, turning the traction control system off
on some surfaces, such as deep snow and loose gravel,
will assist vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Rocking
on page 4-27 for information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
If you press the TC button once, the traction
control system will turn off and the traction control
system warning light will come on. If you press the
TC button again within five seconds, the traction control
system will remain off, the warning light will stay on,
and the stability system will enter Competitive Driving
Mode. Competitive Driving will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See Competitive Driving
Center (DIC)” in the Navigation Supplement for
more information. Press the TC button again to turn the
system back on. If you press and hold the TC button
for five seconds, the StabiliTrak® and Traction Control
systems will turn off. Press the TC button again to
turn StabiliTrak® and Traction Control back on. For more
You can turn the
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
system off by pressing the
TC (traction control)
button located on the
steering wheel.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Competitive Driving Mode (CTS-V)
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
The driver can select this optional handling mode
by pressing the Traction Control button on the steering
wheel twice within five seconds. COMPETITIVE
DRIVING will be displayed in the DIC. Competitive
driving mode allows the driver to have control of
the power applied to the rear wheels, while the
StabiliTrak® system helps steer the vehicle by selective
brake application. In competitive mode, the levels at
which StabiliTrak® is engaged have been modified
to better suit a performance driving environment. When
the traction control warning light is on, the Traction
Control System will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
If your vehicle has this feature, your limited-slip rear
axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice,
sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of
the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no
traction and the other does, this feature will allow the
wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
stability control system called StabiliTrak®. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists you
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak®
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of
the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the
direction which you are steering.
When you press the Traction Control button again, or
turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, the Traction Control
System will be on. The traction engaged symbol will
be displayed temporarily in the DIC and a chime
will be heard.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system activates, a Stability System Engaged
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
Service Stability System message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings
displayed, the system is not operational. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever you start
your vehicle. To help assist you with directional control
of the vehicle, you should always leave the system
on. You can turn StabiliTrak® off if you ever need
to through the TC (traction control) on/off button.
page 4-10.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver
to maintain brake application. When this happens the
brake pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let the system work for you.
You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes will return
to normal operation after the brake pedal has
been released.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
If your vehicle has this system, it varies the amount of
effort required to steer the vehicle in relation to the
speed of the vehicle.
The amount of steering effort required is less at slower
speeds to make the vehicle more maneuverable
and easier to park. At faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like feel to the steering.
This provides maximum control and stability.
If your vehicle seems harder to steer than normal when
parking or driving slowly, there may be a problem
with the system. You will still have power steering, but
steering will be stiffer than normal at slow speeds.
See your dealer for service.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it is all right to pass,
providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember that your passenger side outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to
a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Competitive Driving
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
competitive driving.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, the engine may use more
oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels can
damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil level
often during racing or other competitive driving and
keep the level at or near the upper mark that
shows the proper operating range on the engine oil
dipstick. For information on how to add oil, see
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are
driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make
a lot of things invisible.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as the headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are
not even aware of it.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
on page 5-58.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often
as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
{CAUTION:
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has
the Traction Control System (TCS), you will want to slow
down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
Under certain conditions, you may want to turn the TCS
off, such as when driving through deep snow and loose
gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-31
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
For more information about using tire chains on your
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. You should
turn your traction control system off. See Traction
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1)
or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free
your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on
the Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Item
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-39 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Do not carry more than 132 lbs (60 kg) in the trunk.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
United States version shown, Canada similar
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
The Certification label, found on the rear edge of the
driver’s side rear passenger door, tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
{CAUTION:
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a device known as
a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” following for
more information.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-24.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
Dolly Towing
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow any
trailer. If towing is required, see your dealer for the
proper towing equipment.
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission or in NEUTRAL for a manual
transmission.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle
If your vehicle has the 2.8L V6 engine (VIN Code T),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
your engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of your vehicle.
Fuel
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you may choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when
you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
your engine needs service.
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a V8 engine, use premium unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher.
You may also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced, and you may notice a slight audible
knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock.
If the octane is less than 87, you may notice a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
for additional information.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have to add anything
to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only
the minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealer
has additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where
you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of such
gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the emission
control system may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available
in your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. To open the
fuel door, push inward on the forward edge of the fuel
door until the rear edge can be pulled outward.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Check Gas Cap message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will be displayed if the fuel cap is not
page 3-61 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-41.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
CTS shown, CTS-V similar
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the front edge of the grille near the
center. Move the release lever to the side and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-104.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped) (Not
Shown). See “When to Check and What to Use”
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under Engine
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 6.0L V8 CTS-V, you will see the following:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-104.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir. See “When to Check
page 5-27.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
There is an oil pressure
light in the instrument
cluster and an Oil Pressure
Low - Stop Engine
message on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
If the light and/or message appear on the instrument
cluster, it means you need to check your engine oil level
right away. For more information, see “Oil Pressure
Low - Stop Engine” under DIC Warnings and Messages
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-114.
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
V6 Engines
V6 Engines
V8 Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
V8 Engine
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For V6 Engine Vehicles Only
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
For V8 Engine Vehicles Only
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
You should look for this on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System and the Oil Life Indicator
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil
message in the DIC being turned on, reset the system.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
After the oil has been changed, the change engine oil
message and the oil life indicator must be reset. To reset
the message and indicator, use one of the following
procedures:
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil message in the DIC
will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained
service people who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Base Audio System
Press the CLR button located to the right of the DIC
display to acknowledge the change engine oil message.
This will clear the message from the display and reset it.
To reset the oil life indicator, use the following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button
located to the right of the DIC display to access
the DIC menu.
2. Once XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the oil life
indicator will be reset. Repeat the steps if the
percentage does not return to 100.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the change engine oil message comes back on when
you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has
not reset. Repeat the procedure.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Navigation System
If you have the navigation system, see “Vehicle
Customization” in the Navigation System Owner
Supplement for how to reset the oil life indicator.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
CTS shown, CTS-V similar
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle
it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you
have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
on page 6-15 for the correct part number for
the filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
4. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
{CAUTION:
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the two screws located on the sides of
the cover.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
2. Lift the cover off.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Change Transmission
Fluid Message and the Transmission
Fluid Indicator
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to your Cadillac
dealership service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible.
After the transmission fluid has been changed, the
Change Trans Fluid message and the transmission fluid
life indicator must be reset. To reset the message and
indicator, use one of the following procedures:
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Base Audio System
Press the CLR (Clear) button located to the right of the
DIC display to acknowledge the CHANGE TRANS
FLUID message. This will clear the message from the
display and reset it.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
To reset the transmission fluid life indicator, use the
following steps:
1. Press the up or down arrow on the INFO button
located to the right of the DIC display to access
the DIC menu.
2. Once the XXX% TRANS FLUID LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the CLR button.
The percentage will return to 100, and the
transmission fluid life indicator will be reset.
3. Repeat the steps if the percentage does not
return to 100.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, see your
navigation system supplement for instructions on how
to acknowledge the Change Trans Fluid message
and reset the transmission fluid life indicator.
Manual Transmission Fluid
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
When to Check Manual
Transmission Fluid
To check the fluid level, do the following:
1. Remove the filler plug.
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission
fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason
for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to
your Cadillac dealership service department and have it
repaired as soon as possible.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good and your vehicle is a CTS,
replace the gasket and reinstall the filler plug. If the
fluid level is good and your vehicle is a CTS-V,
apply LOCTITE ® #516 or equivalent sealant to the
threads and then reinstall the filler plug.
How to Check Manual
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose
to have this done at your Cadillac dealership service
department.
With either vehicle, be sure the plug is fully seated.
If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described
in the next steps.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Manual Transmission Fluid When to Check and What to Use
Here is how to add fluid. See Recommended Fluids and
fluid to use.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. If your vehicle is a CTS, replace the gasket and
reinstall the filler plug. If your vehicle is a CTS-V,
apply LOCTITE ® #516 or equivalent sealant to the
threads and then reinstall the filler plug.
Again, with either vehicle, be sure the plug is
fully seated.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid to use.
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
will not correct a leak.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Make sure the fluid level is at the MIN (Minimum) line
on the side of the reservoir. If it is not, remove the cap
and add the proper fluid until the level reaches the
MIN line.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
Engine Coolant
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-30.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a
year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 for more information.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD/FROID line on the side of the surge tank.
Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the side
to the horizontal mark.
If the Check Coolant Level message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on and stays on,
it means you are low on engine coolant. See DIC
information.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
There are three engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
An overheat warning, along with a Check Coolant Level
message, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no Check
Coolant Level message, but see or hear no steam,
the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. Should an overheated
engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss
in power and engine performance. A low coolant and/or
engine overheat warning will indicate that an overheat
condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows, as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still have
the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
3.6L V6 Engine shown, 2.8L V6 and
6.0L V8 Engines similar
A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level should
be at or above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side
of the coolant surge tank. If the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be near the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank. If it is not,
you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
on page 5-32 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one-quarter turn and
then stop.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator hose
is the top hose coming out of the radiator, on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. Watch out for
the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the Check
Coolant Level message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), the coolant is at the
proper fill level. If a Check Coolant Level message does
appear, repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall the pressure
cap, or see your dealer.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
the location of the power
steering fluid reservoir.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid level
for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not
work at all.
If the ignition is in ON and the brake fluid is low,
the “Check Brake Fluid” message will be displayed in
the DIC. See “Check Brake Fluid Message” under
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts
so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do
not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
{CAUTION:
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if
page 5-44 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
After a power loss, such as disconnecting the battery
or removing the maxi fuses in the power distribution fuse
block, the following steps must be performed to calibrate
the electronic throttle control. If this is not done, the
engine will not run properly.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON. Do not start the engine.
Battery
2. Leave the ignition in ON for at least three minutes
so that the electronic throttle control will cycle and
re-learn its home position.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it
is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement
page 5-12 for battery location.
3. Turn the ignition to OFF.
4. Start and run the engine for at least 30 seconds.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle,
as well as the positive (+) terminal location on
your vehicle’s battery. See Engine Compartment
location of the battery.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the ECM,
ECM mounting bracket, or any cables that attach
to the ECM bracket, you may damage the ECM.
Always attach the negative cable to your vehicle’s
remote negative ground location, instead of the
ECM, ECM bracket, or any cables attached to the
ECM bracket.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located
between the battery and the underhood fuse block.
You should always use this remote ground
location, instead of the terminal on the battery.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described in the following procedure.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps
are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or
other flat surface.
for more information.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the way to the wall or other
flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice,
or mud on it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being
performed.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full
tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)
sitting on the driver’s seat.
2. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record
the distance.
• The spare tire is in its original location in the vehicle.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and mark it.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line the width of the
vehicle at the wall or other flat surface where it
was marked it Step 4.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex socket.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. If you
turn it clockwise, it will raise the beam and if
you turn it counterclockwise, it will lower the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned
at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the opposite headlamp.
Passenger’s Side Shown
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs,
{CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the
bulb package.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
6. Install a new bulb.
B. Fog Lamp
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Sidemarker Lamps
A. Taillamps and
Stoplamps
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
To replace a fog or turn signal lamp bulb, do the
following:
1. Remove the protection shield located on the
underside of the front of the vehicle by pulling
out the push-pins located on the underside of the
protection shield.
2. Reach up behind the front bumper area from under
the vehicle to access the lamp housing.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the housing by
turning the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
information.
4. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
lifting the two plastic clips.
2. Remove the compact spare tire cover by turning the
wing nut counterclockwise.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the four convenience net wing nuts.
Back-Up and License Plate Lamps
4. Pull the carpet back away from the body of the
vehicle on the side with the burned out bulb.
5. Remove the two mounting screws from the
lamp assembly.
6. Pull out the lamp assembly to expose the
bulb sockets.
7. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket out of
the lamp reflector.
8. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
A. Back-Up Lamps
9. Install a new bulb.
B. License Plate Lamps
10. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
To replace a back-up or license plate bulb, do the
following:
information.
2. Remove the cloth cover on the trunk lid by pulling
out the three push-pins located on the underside of
the trunk lid.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the eight mounting nuts from the underside
of the trunk lid by turning the nuts counterclockwise.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
page 6-9.
4. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle
to expose the bulb sockets.
5. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull the bulb and socket out
of the lamp reflector.
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
6. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
7. Install a new bulb.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up, Front/Rear Turn Signal,
Stoplamp and Taillamp
Fog Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off
again when the wipers are in the out-wipe position.
The driver’s side blade will be straight up and
down on the windshield.
Bulb Number
3157K
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the
windshield.
9145
W5WLL
2825 L/W5WL
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a
T-shaped position. You should be able to see a tab.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up
on the assembly to lock it into place.
5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper blade
assembly down far enough to release it from the
J-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has P245/45R18 or
P225/50R18 size tires, they are classified as
low-profile tires. Low-profile tires are more
susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb
impact than standard profile tires. Tire and or wheel
assembly damage can occur when coming into
contact with road hazards like, potholes, or sharp
edged objects or when sliding into a curb. Your
GM warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes and other road hazards.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
If you choose to use snow tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,
load range, and speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The
TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the first
character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary
use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at
speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has
lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only)
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle
tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and
Rim Association.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep
on driving. The tire can operate effectively with no air
pressure for up to 65 miles (105 km) at speeds up
to 55 mph (90 km/h). The shorter the distance you drive
and the slower the speed, the greater the chance
that the tire will not have to be replaced. When a tire is
filled with air, it provides a cushion between the road
and the wheel. Because you won’t have this cushion
when driving on a deflated run-flat tire, try to avoid
potholes that could damage your wheel and require
replacement of it.
Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle also has
a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) which will alert you if
there is a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires. See
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over
55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warning
light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you’ve driven on
the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you’ve driven any distance on a run-flat
tire, check with an authorized run-flat tire service center
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should
be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat feature,
all replacement tires must be self-supporting tires.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As soon as possible, contact the nearest authorized GM
or run-flat servicing facility for inspection and repair or
replacement. To locate the nearest GM or run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Service. See Roadside
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
{CAUTION:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than
other tires and could explode during improper
service. You or others could be injured or
killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only an
authorized run-flat service center repair,
replace, dismount, and mount run-flat tires.
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
These sensors contain batteries which are designed to
last for 10 years under normal driving conditions.
See your dealer if you ever need to have a wheel
replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment tires
and shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they are cold. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire and
loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle
handling and ride comfort, never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
When to Check
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, if your vehicle has one.
The compact spare should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information regarding the compact spare
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following chart to determine the cold tire
inflation pressure when operating your vehicle under
these conditions.
High Speed Operation (CTS-V)
{CAUTION:
Tire Size: 245/45R18 96W Recommended Cold
Tire Inflation Pressure for High Speed Operation
at 130 mph (209 km/h) or more:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
Occupant and Cargo
Weight:
600 lbs (272 kg) Up to
882 lbs (400 kg)
(Vehicle Capacity
Weight)
Occupant and Cargo
Weight:
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Less than
600 lbs (272 kg)
Front
Tires
Rear Tires Front Tires Rear Tires
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
34 psi
(235 kPa)
When you end high-speed driving, return the tires to the
cold inflation pressures shown on the tire and loading
page 4-32.
The CTS-V performance series has 245/45R18 96W size
tires. These high-performance tires require inflation
pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds
of 130 mph (209 km/h) or higher with occupants and
cargo weighing 600 lbs. (272 kg) up to 882 lbs. (400 kg).
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted on
the tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in
the vehicle once every 60 seconds while the vehicle
is being driven, and once every 60 minutes if the vehicle
is stationary for more than 15 minutes.
When the low tire pressure
telltale is illuminated, one
or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
If your vehicle has the base audio system, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) displays TPMS warnings and
messages on the radio’s display screen. See System
on page 3-61 for additional information and details
about the DIC operation and displays. If your vehicle
has the Navigation system, TPMS warnings and
messages are displayed on the message center
screen, located inside the tachometer. See Message
message center operation and displays.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the size
of your vehicle’s original tires and their recommended
cold inflation pressures. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32, for the location of the tire and loading
information label. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS
will display the Check Tire Pressure message on
the DIC or message center and, at the same time,
illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol on the
instrument panel cluster.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the engine off.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle
has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
3. Using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the RKE transmitter. A single horn chirp
will sound, indicating that the TPMS system is
ready, and the sensor matching process can begin.
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the tires, the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire and wheel position. The
sensors are matched, to the tire and wheel positions,
in the following order: left front (LF), right front (RF),
right rear (RR), and left rear (LR) using a TPMS
diagnostic tool. See your GM dealer for service.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds, confirms that the sensor
identification code has been matched to this tire
position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gage, or a key.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each tire
and wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing tire pressure do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
You will have two minutes to match the first tire and
wheel position, and five minutes overall, to match all
four tire and wheel positions. If it takes longer than
two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel, or more
than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel
positions the matching process stops and you will
need to start over.
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. After hearing the confirming double horn chirp, for
the left rear tire, exit the matching process by
turning the ignition switch to OFF.
Once you re-install the TPMS sensors, the error
message should go off. See your GM dealer for service
if all TPMS sensors are installed and the error
message comes on and stays on.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading
information label.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry and Science Canada.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The TPMS will not function properly, if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, the spare tire and
wheel assembly does not contain a TPMS sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, or if the
system detects a missing or inoperable sensor,
the Service Tire Monitor System message will be
displayed on the DIC. If you have replaced a tire and
wheel assembly without transferring the TPMS sensors,
the error message will be displayed. Once you
re-install the TPMS sensors, the message should go off.
See your GM dealer for service if all TPMS sensors
are installed and the error message comes on and stays
on. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If your vehicle has a message center and the system
detects a missing or inoperable sensor an error
message of several dashes – – – will be shown on
the message center display. If you have replaced a
tire and wheel assembly without transferring the
TPMS sensors, the error message will be displayed.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-77 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not include
it in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
page 4-32, for an example of the tire and loading
information label and its location on your vehicle.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system will need to have the sensors
reset after a tire rotation is performed. A special tool
is needed to reset the sensor identification codes.
See your dealer for service.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get
tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your
vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand and type of tires on
all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 5-60 for additional information.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire
and wheel assembly. If equipped, it is all right
to drive with your vehicle’s compact spare tire
temporarily, it was developed for use on your
page 5-93.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your vehicle’s
original equipment tires may not be available for H, V,
W, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow
tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s
maximum speed capability.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are
the same size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one
side or the other, the alignment may need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels may
need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper
diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
more information.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
Lifting Your Vehicle (CTS-V)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove
the device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the rear tires.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Place the shift lever in REVERSE (R) and
firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you can put blocks in front of and
behind the wheels. Also see Parking Your
Vehicle (Manual Transmission) on page 2-36
information.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure the jack you are using meets the weight
standards for your vehicle and is in good
working order.
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using only contacts
the jacking location lift points and is not leaning
on any other vehicle components such as the
rocker panels, the floor pan, or the stone guard
moldings.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to place
the jack in the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Front
Lifting From the Rear
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
The rear lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.
1. Locate the front lifting points using the diagram
shown above and corresponding hoisting notches
located in the plastic molding. The notches in
the plastic molding are marked with a triangle shape
to help you find them. The front lifting location is
about 14 inches (35.6 cm) from the rear edge of the
front wheel well.
1. Locate the rear lifting points using the diagram
shown above and corresponding hoisting notches
located in the plastic molding. The notches in
the plastic molding are marked with a triangle shape
to help you find them. The rear lifting location is
about 7 inches (17.8 cm) from the front edge of the
rear wheel well.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the front lifting point.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop — well off the road if possible.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the rear lifting point.
additional information.
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a spare tire,
information shows you how to use your vehicle’s tire
changing equipment and how to change a flat tire safely.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever
have a “blowout”, here are a few tips about what
to expect and what to do:
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information.
Run-Flat Tires (CTS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Run-flat tires can
operate effectively with no air pressure for a limited
distance and speed. Your vehicle also has a Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) which will alert you if there is
a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires. These
tires perform so well without any air pressure that a Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you when
there is a low tire condition.
{CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could
be injured and your vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools and
procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over
55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warning
light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
To order a service manual see Service Publications
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as
a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
(CTS Only)
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
To gain access to the spare tire and jacking equipment,
do the following:
1. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare tire
cover counterclockwise
to remove it. Then
remove the cover.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The tools you will be using next include the jack (A)
and the wheel wrench (B).
2. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wheel wrench.
information about the compact spare tire.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire (CTS Only)
2. Find the jacking location using the diagram above
and corresponding hoisting notches located in the
plastic molding. The notches in the plastic molding
are marked with a triangle shape to help you
find them.
1. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them
yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle
about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the wrench
off the lug nut for each turn.
The front location (A) is about 14 inches (35.6 cm)
from the rear edge of the front wheel well, and
the rear location (B) is about 7 inches (17.8 cm)
from the front edge of the rear wheel well.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack
you could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into
the metal flange located behind the triangle on the
plastic molding as shown.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under
the vehicle.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
10. Install the spare tire.
11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
12. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with
your hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (CTS Only)
sequence as shown.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you will need to store the flat tire in your trunk.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will note fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Remove the foam support so that the flat tire will fit
in the storage area. Place the flat tire with the
appearance-side face down and store the jack container
in the center of the tire. See the diagram for more
information.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire in the trunk:
Compact Spare Tire (CTS Only)
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a
time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
A. Compact Spare Tire
Cover Wing Nut
B. Compact Spare Tire
Cover
C. Plastic Wing Nut
D. Retainer
E. Jack Container with
Wheel Wrench and Jack
F. Flat Road Tire
G. Compact Spare Tire
H. Foam Insert
I. Bolt
J. Wheel Wrench
K. Jack
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
L. Jack Container
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Covers
Washing Your Vehicle
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Care of Safety Belts
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-97.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finish Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff
off immediately after application.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Spot Lifter
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Odor Eliminator
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpful if you
ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find
the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a fuse blows, see your dealer
for service immediately.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks, one located
in the engine compartment on the passenger’s side
and the other two under the rear seat.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Relays
Usage
LO SPEED
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
FAN RELAY Low Speed Fan Motor
MINI
HI SPEED FAN
High Speed Fan Motor
RELAY MINI
ACCESSORY Wipe-Wash, PRNDL, Accessory
RELAY MINI Power Outlets
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located on
each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off.
S/P FAN
Series/Parallel Fan
RELAY MINI
PARK LAMP
Parking Lamps
RELAY MICRO
HORN RELAY
Horn
MICRO
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
HI BEAM
RELAY MICRO
DRL RELAY
MICRO-OPT
Usage
Wiring
Usage
Harnesses
High-Beam Headlamps
BODY W/H
BODY W/H
ENG W/H
Wiring Harness Connection
Wiring Harness Connection
Engine Wiring Harness Connection
Daytime Running Lamps
LO BEAM
RELAY/HID
MINI-OPT
Low-Beam HID Headlamps
J Cases
Usage
HDLP WASH
RELAY
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
RRPDB (Passenger’s Side Rear
Power Distribution Box)
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
LRPDB (Driver’s Side Rear Power
Distribution Box)
R REAR
Headlamp Washer Motor
MINI-OPT
R REAR
L REAR
L REAR
SPARE
BLOWER
RELAY MINI
FOG LAMP
RELAY MICRO
Not Used
Front Blower
Fog Lamps
MAIN RELAY
MICRO
STARTER
RELAY MINI
CMP CLU
RELAY MICRO
IGN-1 RELAY
MICRO
HI FAN
LO FAN
BLOWER
STARTER
ABS
High Cooling Fan Motor
Low Cooling Fan Motor
PWM Fan Motor Assembly
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain/ECM
Starter Solenoid
Compressor Clutch
Ignition Switch (ON)
Anti-Lock Brake System
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
RT PARK
HORN
Usage
Passenger’s Side Taillamp
Assembly, Front Sidemarker and
Front Parking Lamp Assembly
Dual Horn Assembly
Fuses
Usage
Steering Wheel Control Pad,
Headlamp Switch
Clutch Switch (Normal Closed),
Clutch Switch (Normal Open),
Jumper to Start Relay Coil for
Automatic Transmission
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Heated Washer Nozzles
Driver’s & Passenger’s Side
STRG CTLS
HTR VLV/
CLTCH
LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
WASH NOZ
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
RT LOW BEAM
Headlamp
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
PRE O2/CAM Oxygen Sensors, CAM Phaser,
Canister Purge
RT HI BEAM
Headlamp
Manual Transmission Output Speed
Transmission Control Module,
Engine Control Module, Instrument
Panel Cluster
TOS
Sensor
Not Used
TCM/IPC
SPARE
THEFT
ECM (Engine Control Module),
TCM (Transmission Control Module),
PASS-Key® III+ Module
SPARE
Not Used
Front Bank Ignition Modules,
Mass Airflow Sensor
IGN MOD/MAF
Driver’s Side Taillamp Assembly,
Front Sidemarker and Front Parking
Lamp Assembly
Rear License Plate Assembly, Dash
Integrated Module (DIM)
DIM, ALDL (Assembly Line Data
Link)
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Module
Electronic Control Module
ELEC PRNDL Electronic PRNDL (Export)
LT PARK
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
DIMMING
DIM/ALDL
Ignition Switch (Power to IGN-3
and CRANK)
IGN SW
VOLT CHECK DIM (Dash Integration Module)
TCM (Transmission Control Module),
FLASHER
ECM
ECM (Engine Control Module),
ECM/TCM
IPC (Instrument Panel Cluster),
PASS-Key® III+ Module
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
WPR MOD
Usage
Fuses
CCP
Usage
Climate Control
Windshield Wiper Module Assembly
ODD
INJ/COILS
Odd Ignition Coils, Fuel Injectors,
Odd Injection Coils
EVEN
INJ/COILS
Even Injection Coils
COMP CLUTCH Compressor Clutch
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
WPR SW
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
Center Console Accessory
Power Outlet
Driver’s and Passenger’s Side
Oxygen Sensors, LRPDB (Pusher
Cooling Fan Relay)
OUTLET
Circuit
Usage
Headlamp Washer Motor
Breakers
POST 02
HDLP WASH
C/B-OPT
Instrument Panel Accessory
Power Outlet
I/P OUTLET
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
To access the rear underseat fuse blocks, you will have
to first remove the rear seat cushion.
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If, when removing or reinstalling the rear
seat, you do not do it carefully, you could damage
the fuse center. Avoid contact between the rear seat
and the fuse center whenever you remove or
reinstall the rear seat.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of
the vehicle.
Rear Pass-Through Seat
3. Slide the cushion out one of the rear doors and set
it aside.
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
seat cushion at all, it will not be there to work
for the next passenger. The person sitting in
that position could be badly injured. After
reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and are not twisted.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Position the seat cushion so that you can route
the safety belts through the proper slots in the
seat cushion.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
Split-Folding Rear Seat
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the seat
cushion snaps into place.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly routed
4. Push and pull on the seat cushion to make sure it
is locked into place.
through the seat cushion or is twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash. If the
safety belt has not been routed through the
5. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat cushion.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Driver’s Side)
Fuses
SPARE
SPARE
AUDIO
SPARE
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Radio, OnStar Module
Not Used
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
SPARE
Not Used
DRIVER
DR MOD
Driver’s Door Module
Taillamps, Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp, Flasher Module, ABS
Module, Trailer Lamps
Headlamp Leveling System Chassis
Sensors (Export Only)
Not Used
CCP (Climate Control Panel)
The driver’s side rear fuse block is located under the
rear seat on the driver’s side of the vehicle. The rear
seat cushion must be removed to access the rear fuse
block. See “Removing the Rear Seat Cushion” listed
previously.
BAS
HDLP
LEVELING
SPARE
CCP
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
Motor, Shifter Assembly
IGN 3
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
Not Used
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
L FRT HTD
Driver’s Heated Seat Module
SEAT MOD
MEM/ADAPT Driver’s Power Seat Switch, Memory
SEAT
Seat Module
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
TRUNK
DR RELEASE
REV LAMP
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
Trunk Release Motor
RELAY MICRO License Plate Lamp Assembly
REVERSE
LAMP
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
License Plate Lamp Assembly
R POSITION
RELAY MICRO
Passenger’s Side Position Lamp
SPARE
POSITION
LAMP
Not Used
Taillamp Assemblies, Front Position
Lamp Assemblies
IGN 3 RELAY Heated Seat Modules, Air Inlet
MICRO
Motor, Shifter Assembly
STANDING
LAMP
Control for Position Lamp Relays
RLY MICRO
J Cases
Usage
AMP
Audio Amplifier
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
PUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)
Power Seat Switches, Memory
Seat Module
SEAT C/B
Relays
BAS RELAY
MINI
PUSHER FAN Pusher Fan (Export Only)
L POSITION
RELAY MICRO
Usage
Brake Apply Sensor
Misc.
JOINT
CONNECTOR
Usage
Joint Connector
Driver’s Side Position Lamp
TRK DR REL
SOL RELAY
MICRO
Trunk Release Motor
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
(Passenger’s Side)
Fuses
Usage
TRUNK DIODE Trunk Lamp
POWER
SOUNDER
SPARE
Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor
Not Used
CANISTER
VENT
Canister Vent Solenoid
FUEL
Fuel Pump Motor
Not Used
PUMP MTR
SPARE
The passenger’s side rear fuse block is located under
the rear seat on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The rear seat cushion must be removed to access the
rear fuse block. See “Removing the Rear Seat
Cushion” listed previously.
R FRT HTD
SEAT MOD
SPARE
Passenger’s Side Heated Seat
Module
Not Used
SDM (Sensing Diagnostic Module)
ISRVM (Inside Rearview Mirror),
Power Sounder, RIM
Anti-Lock Brake System
Not Used
Not Used
AIR BAG
RIM
To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located
at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the
cover off.
ABS
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Not Used
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
INTERIOR
LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
PSGR DR MOD Right Front Passenger Door Module
RIM (Rear Integration Module),
Ignition Switch, Key Lock Cylinder
RIM/IGN SW
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
REAR FOG
LAMP
Usage
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
Not Used
TV Tuner Assembly (Export Only),
VICS (Vehicle Information
Communication System) Module
Relays
Usage
Fuel Pump Motor
FUEL PUMP
MOTOR
RLY MICRO
SPARE
INT LAMP
Hush Panel Lamps, Puddle Lamps,
RELAY MICRO Overhead Courtesy Lamp Assembly
TV/VICS
IGN 1 RELAY
Ignition Switch
MICRO
SPARE
Not Used
J Cases
Usage
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Element
SUNROOF MOD Power Sunroof Module
Circuit
Usage
Usage
Breakers
DR MOD
PWR C/B
Door Modules
Relays
Usage
SPARE
Not Used
REAR DEFOG
RELAY MINI
Misc.
JOINT
CONNECTOR
Rear Window Defogger
Not Used
Joint Connector
SPARE
REAR FOG
LAMP
RLY MICRO
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Cooling System
2.8L HFV6
11.7 qt
12.1 qt
13.4 qt
11.1 L
11.8 L
12.7 L
3.6L HFV6
6.0L V8
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8L HFV6
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
5.7 L
5.7 L
5.7 L
66.2 L
3.6L HFV6
6.0L V8
6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
17.5 gal
Transmission
Automatic
9.5 qt
1.9 qt
9.0 L
1.8 L
6-Speed Manual – CTS
6-Speed Manual – CTS-V
Wheel Nut Torque
3.7 qt
3.5 L
100 lb ft
(140 Y)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
6-Speed Manual
2.8L HFV6
T
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
Automatic
6-Speed Manual
3.6L HFV6
6.0L V8
7
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
U
6-Speed Manual
CTS-V Engine Data
Engine
6.0L V8 (LS2)
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
400 hp (298 kW)
@ 6000 rpm
400 ft lb (542 Nm)
@ 4400 rpm
6.0 L
10.9:1
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Life System and resetting the system.
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
When the Change Engine Oil message appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change
engine oil message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However,
your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Control Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CTS-V Only: Change 6-speed manual
transmission fluid (severe service only).
See footnotes (l) and (m).
CTS-V Only: Change hydraulic clutch
fluid (severe service only).
See footnote (l).
•
•
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
CTS-V Only: Change rear axle fluid
(severe service only).
See footnotes (l) and (m).
•
•
•
•
•
CTS-V Only: Change brake fluid
(severe service only). See footnote (l).
•
•
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service.
•
•
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (p).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all body
door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including
those for the hood, rear compartment, console door,
and any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(m) Change fluid whenever the vehicle has been driven
for 3,000 miles (5 000 km) with the transmission
temperature at 290°F (143°C) or higher without using
an auxiliary fluid cooler. See Message Center (CTS-V)
on page 3-47 and Transmission Fluid Hot Message
on page 3-50.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(n) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(p) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist
you with these checks and services.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(l) Change fluid if the vehicle is used for high
performance operation.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire (CTS Only)
on page 5-84.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-72.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you
or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
on page 2-33.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start
the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start
only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle
starts in any other position, contact your
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch pedal down
halfway, and try to start the engine. The vehicle
should start only when the clutch pedal is pushed
down all the way to the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch is not pushed all the way down,
contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition should
turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in OFF.
• With a manual transmission, the ignition should turn
to OFF only when the key release button is pressed.
The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should also be
identified with the American
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. You should look
for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
Engine Oil
(V8 Engine)
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
Engine Oil
(V6 Engine)
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. For
the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 5-16.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-28.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only
GM Part No. U.S. 88958860, in
Hydraulic
Clutch System Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4
brake fluid.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Rear Axle
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada
89021186).
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and refill add
4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip
Axle Lubricant Additive (GM Part
No. U.S. 1052358, in Canada
992694) where required. See Rear
Axle on page 5-49
Power Steering
System
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
Manual
SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil (GM Part
Transmission No. U.S. 89021806, in Canada
(CTS)
89021807).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Manual
Transmission
(CTS-V)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Automatic
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant
Transmission “Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Hood and Door
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Floor Shift
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Canada 992723) or lubricant
Linkage
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Numbers
Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
2.8L V6 and 3.6L V6
6.0L V8
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
25728874
A2029C
25177917
88984215
25740404
PF2129
PF46
CF133
2.8 L HFV6
3.6 L HFV6
6.0 L V8
12565996
12597464
12571164
41-988
41-990
41-985
Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.3 cm)
12487636
12487638
—
—
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing (CTS-V)
6.0L V8 Engine
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes
Any additional information from Owner Checks and
record pages. You should retain all maintenance
receipts.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right
to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Online Owner Center
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
Customer Assistance Offices
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
United States — Customer Assistance
Canada — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
163-005
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
From Puerto Rico:
Overseas — Customer Assistance
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any situation
covered by the base warranty coverage and at a
nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by
the base warranty. Roadside Service is available only in
the United States and Canada.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist
you and request the following information:
• Towing Service
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
• A description of the problem
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due
to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may
be reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
mileage, and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service Availability
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac
has installed special telecommunication devices called
Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating
Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will
arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac
dealership.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for new
vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursement
of public transportation expenses may be available, for
up to a maximum of five days. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it
is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information about availability.
All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions
for airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to facilitate
repair of detected malfunctions; other information
is stored only in a crash event by computer systems,
such as those commonly called event data
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
recorders (EDR).
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your
vehicle may record information about the condition of the
vehicle and how it was operated, such as data related
to engine speed, brake application, throttle position,
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness,
airbag performance, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access
to the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device that
stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not
covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states with
“no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you will
have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications
Ordering Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you will
notify us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or, write:
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-85
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System (cont.)
Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-108
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors (cont.)
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-42
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-32
Seats (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-114
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Different Size .............................................. 5-75
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|